Scribus the complete course to create layouts

1. Introduction: Hello, everybody, and welcome to this cures, Gimp, the complete cures. Gimp, what is this? It is a powerful photo editing and photo montage software with different features and numerous tools to work with images. It is free and open source software, making it attractive for a wide range of works. It also offer a flexible and configurable interface to suit individual needs. The software offers advanced features to create selection to work with layers and mask, as well as powerful image editing tools. It allows users to work with numerous adjustments to enhance Photos, it also allow users to work with a variety of filters and generate effect. The software can also be used for all type of graphic design such as covers, cards, flyers, and more. It also offers advanced drawing features with numerous painting tools and color manipulation capabilities. You will have an impressive number of possibility with GIMP. The software is very comprehensive, allowing you to create all kinds of project with high quality graphic design. What are the software advantages, why it is useful to use game? Because it is a free and open source software. You can find ergonomic interface. You have a powerful layer system. You have a powerful mask system. You can find advanced selection tools. You can find advanced transformation tools. You will find numerous settings for editing photos. You can have access to painting tools, you can add filters, and you have different mode for quickly enhancing any photos. Now what you will learn in this training curs in this training curs you will learn to master game from scratch. At the end of the training, you will have an excellent levels of proficiency with the software, and you will be able to work with all type of graphic documents. After an explanation of the interface and panel management, you will learn the basics to get starts such as layers and mask. All the tools will be explained in details with concrete example, optimizing your learning of the software. We also learn how to perfectly manage selection, how to create shapes, and how to add text. You will also learn how to edit photos as well as how to add filters and their various uses. At the end of the training course, numerous exercises will allow you to put into practice all the elements in the training course. G the complete curs. 2. Start with dashboard: We're going to see how to start with the dashboard. One of the first things to do is to see how to work with the dashboard and to understand how is these different elements. So first, when we start with a new document here when you go on the top left corner, you have file. In the file, what you will be able to do it is to create a new document, open a document. You will be able to save and export your work. You will have access also to edit all the preferences or to edit the preferences only from this document with the document setups. The edit panels, you will be able to undo do action, so history panels to work with spy and past to work also with some selections. You have also the possibility to adjust to rat style to crat new colors or to replace colors. Here we have items, items, you have different type of tools that you can use with item features. In insert, what you can do, you have different types of tools of conception, like how to crack shapes or how to crack texts, but concretely of the things that you have in insert, you can find again on just this tab below because all these are the different tools. You can manage the page for these panels insert new pages. You can apply Master Page. We see how to work with Master extremely useful in this type of layout software. To manage the guide, you can also manage the snapping option here, grid, two guides, and two items. Here, this is a table, so this is the different table tools that we can use to edit a table. Here this is some extra panels. View panels to work with different options like, for example, the Zoom or the preview on your document, script, Windows and app in Windows, we'll be able to adjust a different window, and I will show you after how you can do that. So first you have these different tabs. After below, you have a tab with different options. You can have a summary of basic things that you can do to create a new document, to open save close and printer again, save as PDF. Then you can undo and redo actions just here. If I just continue, you can also even copy and past from this panel, cut copy and past and after you have the different tools of conception, they are located on this area, like the text tools or the image frame, you have also the possibility to create some shapes or to create lines. So you see a different type of tools of conception. When you continue little bit, you have more advanced about PDF features and on the right, the different preview options. So after to do this type of work, here I place different panels. So for example, in my interface, I decided to place range page panels on the left. I decided on the right to put property panels, content property panels and layer panels. All these panels where their positions, you can then after extend on this direction or this one I can also extend on the direction if I need, as you can see. You have also the possibility if you work with two rows like it is here, you can also move these panels on this direction. For example, I can do something like this and I can move a little bit more to panel, but I cannot in this case, move little really more. So this is the type of thing that we can do with this type of panels, totally in the middle. So you can find your page, your space, your area of work. On the top, you have horizontal rulers, and on the left, you can find vertical rulers. Totally, when you are below, you can work with some Zoom options. You will be able to switch from a page to another one. Here we have just one page, so this is a page number 121. And on this area, we can find backgrounds, and it is the layers. By default, we work on background layers, as you can see, because I place the layer panels. Here we have some coordinate and we have the unit of the document. If you want to change the unit of the document, you can change that here. And in this case, by default, we work in millimeters. So this is some different things that you need to know at the beginning. Concretely, when you go in the top left corners, so different tabs that you can use with different types of tools. At the same time, if you just go below, you have different type of categorize because you have also this categorize that you can drag and move some element. Here, I'm not going to do this because I think it's pretty good to keep all these type of tools with all these type of categorize, but you can edit if really you need. And generally, it's pretty good, so create new documents, sell expert, historic panels. Here's a different type of tools of conception, more options about PDF and totally on the write the preview option because here we use normal preview, and here by default, we are in the edit mode. But we can switch also for the preview mode and Toggle management color system. You want to see, for example, the preview mode, you will be able to activate preview just here. So this is all the basics that you need to know. So after what I will explain, I will explain how you can edit the panels. Edit the preferences first, how you can edit the preferences. And I will explain also how you can edit the panels. So it means to place these property panels, layer panels, arrange patch panels for simple reason that when you go on Window, you have these different type of panels and you can place in the position that you want to perfectly adjust your dashboard at your convenience. 3. Edit preferences: We are going to see how to edit preferences. And to edit preferences, we can go on file here. And when you go on file, you have the possibility to edit the preferences just on this area. You need to understand that the preferences are different than the document setup. So preferences are the preferences for all the documents that you will create. And document setup is to create modification from some preferences only for the document where you are. So the general preferences, it is this one. When I click on this one, you can find user interface here. By default, if you need to, for example, change the language, you have the main window and you have the language here and you can adjust the language here. By default, you have also font size menu with a palette, eight point and eight point, concretely, you have different type of size for the text on this dashboard, and this is the size that we have a default. We're going to keep this one. After you have some pass, concretely, it shows that when, for example, you will save work or export a work by default, this is the pass that it will use, and you can change the pass on your computer. Different keyboard shortcut. So here you have a list of all the shortcuts that you can use. Depending if you can learn the different shortcut, it is up to you. You have shortcuts that we use in different graphic software, and you have order specific in Scribus. It depends. You have some are very interesting, order one are less interesting. It depends about what you want to do. So this one is the shortcut. We have the document setup for all the documents that you will create. So it means if I create a new document by default, the page will be A for page with orientation portrait in millimeters and the white and the eight. So for all the documents that you will create at the beginning, you can define by default what you want just here. And in this case, I will work with A for document in portrait. And it is same. You can change the language as well. You have also the layout here. And with the layout, you have single page or facing page when you create a new document. I will keep single page, you have margin and pleads. So when you will create a new document, even if you can change that when you create a new document, I decided to put zero for the margins and zero for the bleed. But if you want to start with, for example, the margin, you can activate here. If you want that all your document by default, when you start, you go ten for the margin, you can apply ten. If you want, for example, 20 or the bled, you can apply 20. After it's up to you depending on the range of document that you will create, I will come back to the preferences. I will come back to the document setups, margins, and bleeds. Here I will come back with a value of zero and I will activate the proportion just here. Savingt by default, you can have interval of saving by default of 10 minutes. Number fail to keep one and you have enable und radio system up to 99 action. Generally, it's pretty enough. So if I continue a little bit, page size, it just different type of size of page that you can have. Just when you create a new document, they will propose the active size that you have here, and you have more active size that you can integrate on the right. And after to integrate on the right, when you create a new document, you will be able to have more options. So here, it depends if you want to start with one of these. Even if you can after customize the size of your page after, so it's not a problem. Guides by default placement visibility colors, concretely placement, the guides will arrive on the top after you have the baseline grid, content object margin and grid. You can just change the position of the different element if we need. You have a snapping distant and pixel grabac for pixels and the visibility by default will be the guides and the margins. But in the different option here we'll be able to make visible the page grid or the baseline grid after. Here, this is a color, so the guide have a color just like this. If you want to change, you can change, but we can just keep by default these different colors for the guide margin, measure grid, minal grid, baseline grid. After something interesting, it is also the IM tools. So concretely, when you create some text, by default, the text will be with this font family and with this size. So if you want to start with another font family or another size, you can change. By default, the color will be in black as well. So every time when you add text, it will keep this parameter by default, and you can change that for sure after. By default, you will have when you create text just one columns also, just like this. It is same if you integrate image, for example, you want to have field color on line color, and you can change after. If you integrate the shape, for example, when you create rectangles, I decided when I create rectangle to have by default, the red color, and I decided to not have any struck color, so it means a light color. And the line style, I decided to have this line and linewse airline, so it means no white. Regular polygon, if you create a regular polygon, you can define the number of corners that you want, and you can also apply directly the factors here. Even if we can change that after also, when you create a line, it is same by default, the line will appear in black with this style and a line one, one point. You need to change, you prefer something different, you can change. Same for calligraphic paint, arc, and spiral. So every time when you will use one of these tools that we have on the top here, it correspond to the preferences that we can use this. So this is the main thing that we need to do after all the rest. All the rest is not the main features, and I cannot advise you to try to edit all these different do parameters because it is really advanced and generally it's not extremely useful to change any of these parameters. So if you have parameters to change, you can focus on user interface until, for example, item tools, user interface pass, keyboard shortcut documentePt size guide item tools to see the most important things that we need to know when we start with the preferences, just like this. And after you will be able to find again in the document setup, only for the active document. So only for the active document, I can find one more time document setup, guides, I can find also item tools, but only for this document. So this is something that you need to know. 4. Edit windows: We're going to see how to edit windows. So for these two edit windows, we can go on these panels, and we have the possibility to integrate different type of windows. So by default, you won't have this type of interface. By default, you won't have range pages, properties, contend properties or layers. So something that I'm going to do first, it is to remove these windows. For example, if I want to remove range page, I can just click here and I can remove. You can also dragging and moving an element, dragging and moving the window, and you can work with a moving window like this. And if I want to close, I can close. If I want to close this one, I can click here and close this one, I can click here. So by default, you will have this. And as you can see, it's not a perfect way to work. It is like a simple interface. At the beginning, it looks not extremely good for this reason. But you can personalize with a very interesting interface. For example, in my opinion, and something that you can do also for the cures that you can also adjust by yourself, it is to go to Windows. And one of the first panels that we can use it is the property panels. So the property panels will be pretty good. Because you can take the property panels. I can put this, for example, on the right, just like this, you can dragging and move. It is very useful because when you create any type of shape, for example, you will have the possibility to adjust the shapes to add a drop shadow to change some parameters to adjust the strokes, the colors, and the transparency. So extremely useful for everything that you need to use. Second thing that I'm going to add it is layer panels. So the layer panel is located here. I'm going to click on layer. So he place my layer panels here, but if it's not the case, I can just drag in and move in here. So I'm going to show you again. I'm going to click on Window properties, and here and now it appears on this area, and then I can put layers, and I can drag in layers just and scrolling down below. Layer panels, we use less inscrib layer panels that some graphic software for different reasons. But by default, we have just background layers, and you can just stay on the background layers. It's possible, but if you need to create more layer, you can do this. Generally, I prefer to work with layer panels on the bottom right corner on every software. So this is why I decided to place this element here. You can also drag in and move in the position on this area. The other opposites that I'm going to integrate, it is window, content properties. And content properties is going to place my content properties. Here, I will just tracking and moving, and I will place my content properties maybe around this area, just like that. After, yes, just like this. So after to place my content properties, I want to I'm not going to place here. I'm going to place just below properties. So I need to go on properties like this and left click, as you can see now, the two window are on the same rows. If I want to put properties on first, I just need to drag in and move in here. While content properties will be pretty good, I will explain more after when you will create something like image frame, or you will work with text. Automatically, the content property will be adjusted. So if it's a image, it will be content images and extremely useful to recize an image. And if you work with text, it will be text properties here. So extremely useful for the image properties and text properties. So this is why I decided to put this one here. So we'll have the properties and the content properties and just below the er panels. Totally, on the left, I have some place, and I will display something very useful also because we work in a layout software want to work with pages and master. This is why I will work with Arran pages. And Arran pages will be located on the left here. But if it's not the case, you can drag and moving and you can place around here again, as you can see, you can just dragging and moving and place on the left. As you can see, it is a big window. With available master pages, document pages. So here we'll be able to see all the masters and here to see all the pages. And because we work on layout software, it's pretty convenient. You can also adjust here to see more of the pages or to see more, for example, the masters. Each time you can also dragging and moving the window here and you can also dragging and moving the window here. And that's it. Now we have a very interesting interface to start with Scribus, arrange pages, properties, content properties and layers. After if you need to complete, you can put more element. I don't like to have too many windows, just the essentials. But if you want more, you can have something interesting like, for example, halin and distribute panels, and you can place on a specific area. This panel can be pretty interesting because you can work with alignment and distribution. But we can also open the panels when we need. So when we need, we can just open the panels, and it's definitely not a problem. So you can open panels when you need. Here, you have Outline panels. So like panels, you can find a summary of what you have inside your document. For example, inside your document, here we only have one master page and one page, but we can have more elements. So each time when you go on Window, you can also have access to more element just like that. Resources, action history, scrapbook symbols, inline items. Can have more element like this can be also some symbol, but here we don't have anything, so this is why I don't see any element, but it's possible to open these windows also. But they're less useful. I think here we have the things most useful. So to start with the cures and at the same time, I think for you, it's pretty convenient when you work with Scribus. Arrange pages. Here on the left, I think it's pretty good. Properties panels completed with content properties, and we can switch very easy and layer panels if we need to work with the layers in our space of work here. 5. Create document: We're going to see how to create a new document. For this, when I create new document, I have this page. This is a four page. To create a new document, you can run file. You can create new. You can also use from template because you have different templates that you can use. We click a new here, by default, you will have different model of size. As explained that you can find in the preferences and you can add more models. If I select A four, you can select a single page here, portrait, and if I want to create the same page, I will do something like this, and as you can see, I have my page. Now when I create new if I want another page, anor size, I can use, for example, A sue, and this time, I will have a new document with A sue. You can find also the size we have here, the horizontal ruler and the vertical ruler. Let's click on fine you. I will come back to custom so you can create custom size. If, for example, I want a document with maybe 1,600 600 wide and 2008, I will tape this value. You can also change the unit if you prefer to work sometime can be in print or in inches or in centimeter, it's possible. And as you can see, I added another type of document just like this. If I select new here, you have also the possibility if I come back to A for document to activate a margin guide and a bled. So the margin guide, what is this? It is a margin inside. So I edited in the preferences to put zero by default. But by default, you will have a margin. You can activate the proportion if you want to have the margin on the same area. For example, I type 20 and left click and I can apply 20 on each element, but you can also break the proportion, and on the right, I can want only ten and maybe on the ten on the left, I want only ten. Just validate with Enter and I created this new document, and you can see the page with a red color and the margin with a blue color, for example. There also the possibility when you create new to add a bleed and it is same. You can work with different value. For example, I can deactivate the proportion, put on the left, maybe 60, put on the right, maybe 60 as well on the top maybe 20 and on the bottom maybe 20 also. We just validate and now I have a bleed. A bleed, what is this? It is a space of work outside of your page. Sometimes it is convenient if you want to share your work that other people see some information outside of the page. And this is why we can use a bleed. It is the area of work. If I just come back here, let's create another one. I will come back to my properties by default, and something that I will do it is to, for example, I will add a margin gun with a proportion like ten, just like this. Left click and a bleed like maybe 40, and I will validate and I will obtain this random. This is how you can manage the size of the page, the margin, and the bled. Now what you can do, you have the possibility when you create a new document to start with multiple pages. Here, you can define the number of page that you want. If I want to start with six page, I will start with six page. By default, I just forgot to show you you can switch orientation for landscape. And when you click on Landscape, you can also create a new page in Landscape. So this is also something that you need to know. So you can switch here for landscape at any moment. Page come back to portrait. I will define, for example, six page to start, pages validate. Now you can find the six page appearing in our arranged page properties and you can find just here, we have six page also. So we can see the display of the six page appearing here. You can also switch from a page to another one, just clicking on this area when for example, you zoom here, you can define what page you want to have and you can come back at any page. Can also start with a double page. So it means you can start with a page just here. And you can, for example, click on Facing page. If you click on Facing page and you just add only one page, the one page will appear just on the right. We still have one page, but on the Master page, we have left and right. You just have created one page here. If you want to create a double page, you will create new, you select facing page, you select number page two, but the first page needs to be on the left because if the first page is not on the left, the seven page will appear just below. So here I will define right page and one first page on the left, number of page two. First page is on the left. Facing page. And if I just valid it, now we'll have a double page. So if I zoom out, I created a new document with my double page, as you can see. And because we have a double page, by default, we have normal left and normal right on the master page. We can create, for example, a master and have this for the left and for the right as well. Same. You can create multiple double pages. You can select, for example, facing pages. I can define maybe six page. I will start on the left. You can also start on the right, but it just that the first page will be on the right. It's logical because you can when you create a book, you can have just the first page on the right. So this is why this work like this. And if I just validate here, as you can see, I have three double pages, just like that. One, two, three, four, five, six, and double page one, two, and three. Don't forget that you can edit the properties after. So what does it mean? It means that at any moment, you can go on file here. I'm going to create just a new document. And yes, so you can create a new document. If you want to edit the properties after, you can go on file and you have document setup. Thanks to the document setup, if I want to change the layout, the margin blin saving option here, I can only for this document, if I want to switch for a sue, I click for Au, and that's it. I change the size of my document. You can go on file document setup, and you can adjust the size of your document just here. So if you need after you want to enter some specific dimension, I want, for example, 200 and here I want, for example, 300. I can just validate this value. I just click and validate. And as you can see, you will be able to adjust the size. So after with document setup, as you can see, 203 hundred just here, 200 wide and 308. So after that, you can go at any moment, document set up and you can adjust at your convenience. If I want to come back to A four, I will switch for A four just like this. You need to zoom in zoom out to see the adjustment. So this is how you can create a new document. So as you can see multiple options, you need to understand the size, you need to understand the margin, the bleed, and how you can create multiple page or how you can create a double page at the beginning. 6. Master navigation: We are going to see how to work with navigation. So so extremely important when you start, it is to see how to work with navigation. So by default, we have this page. I created this new page, and when you just scroll down below, you can find different parameters. And the first parameter can be the level of zoom. So for example, you can change the level of zooms just here and you can adjust your level of zooms as you can see. This is one of the first things to do. After that, you can see Zoom out. You can zoom out here and you can see Zoom in. You have also the possibility to zoom in by the stating value in tools preferences, and by preferences, we have a value of zoom by step, and we can use this one. So here I'm going to zoom out again. Here, you will be able to see on what page you are working. So this is the first things to do. Something that you can do also, you can move you can find this tab here. This is a vertical tab to dragging and moving here or this is a horizontal tab and dragging and moving here. I will create a rectangle, for example, I will select default shape rectangles, and I will create rectangles around this area. If for example, I click here or I increase my evl of Zoom until here, I can move vertically like this and I can move horizontally like this as well. S here. So now how you can work to make something more simple. So it means zoom in zoom out with the scroll wheel. If you want to zoom in and zoom out with the scroll wheel, you just need to Press control on the keyboard, and when you press Control, you drag and move the scroll wheel. So you press control, and you drag and move the scroll wheel like this. And thanks to that, you can zoom in, zoom out. If you want to zoom more on this area, you place the cursor here and you use control on the scroll wheel and you can zoom in, zoom out more here. If I want to zoom more on this corner on the red rectangle, I place my cursor here, control, dragging and moving the scroll wheel, and I can zoom more on this area, as you can see. Now when you zoom, if you want to move vertically, you can just move the scroll wheel. And when you move the scroll wheel, you can dragging and moving vertically. And when you press shift and move the scroll wheel, you can move horizontally. So here, I'm moving horizontally as you can see, just like that. So you can move also with a scroll wheel horizontally, vertically. So if you want to move vertically, you just dragging and moving here. And if you press shift, you just dragging and moving here, just like this. So let zoom out. Control, dragging and move the scroll wheel, and I can zoom out. If you want to dragging and moving, you can also click on the scroll wheel and you have end appearing here. And with this and, you can just move like this, as you can see, I'm going to show you again. I decide to zoom control and drag and move the scroll wheel. And now if I want to move, I can click on the scroll wheel and the end is going to appear and as you can see, I can move like this. This is something extremely important. You can use and tools, and for this, you click on the scroll wheel and you can just drag in and moving at your convenience on your space of work. Just like that. So after to understand this base, you can have access to more options. When I go on the left here, you won't have directly some options on this area about how to zoom in Zoom out or fit. But if you go and view here, you can find Zoom and feed 28 feet to white just here. So for example, view, Zoom, feed to eight. So you can fit the eight of the page here like this to your space of work. You go on Zoom, you have also the shortcut, as you can see, control zero, fit to wide, and it will fit the wide of the page depending on the windows that you have. When you click on view, you can then activate a percentage, for example, 50%, 75%. You can use 100%. You can use 200%, and then you can use 400%, just like this. So you can have different value, and now when you scroll below, you can find here we have 400%, just Okay. So after that, we don't have many more things to know. So concretely, if I make a summary to make something simple, to zoom in, zoom out, you press Control and you draw again move the scroll wheel, and in a fast way, you can zoom in and zoom out. If you want to move, for example, vertically, you just move the scroll wheel and you can move vertically. If you want to move horizontally, you press shift and you draw again move the scroll wheel to move horizontally, just like that. You have also the possibility to click on the scroll wheel and you will have end too in a fast way, you can drag and moving like this and you can move. You have also the possibility to just move the vertical tab here and to just move the horizontal tab here. And if you want to have access to some fit, you can click here. And if you want to also work with a level of Zoom, you have these options as you can see just below, and you can define also percentage value, for example. So it sees how we can work with this. 7. Master selections: We're going to see how to work with selections. And this is something that we are going to do. First, it is to create rectangles. We'll create different rectangle just here. And after that, I can create a first rectangle on this area, and I can go on the property panels on the property panels, you can find colors. So by default, as I explained, I decided to when I create any shapes to have the red color and to not have strock So concrete feel red and struck none. When I go and feel, I will keep this red color first, but I can change if I need, I will start with the red colors. And I will extend little bit Oops. Not here because if you double click, you can edit the point, but we'll see that after. So first, I will extend the rectangle here. I'll create another one just below, and I will activate another colors, and I will create another one, just here with another colors, and I will create another one, just here with the white color. So by default, every time when you de selic so you click, for example, outside, you will be redirected to your select select item tools. With this one, you just go left click. And when you go Left click, you can select shape. You can select any object. This object, if for example, you select handles, you will be able to resize just like this. If you want to resize proportionally, you press Shift and left click you press Control and left click to keep the proportion. So as you can see, I will keep the proportion with Control and left click. If you want to resize from the center, you press Shift, and you will resize from the center. And if you press Shift and control, you can keep the ratio, and you can resize from the center as well. If you want to edit more in details, we'll see that when we will craft shapes, you will have to go on the top right corner in the property panels, and here we have more options. Bit up for the position, the white, the eight, the rotation, and more options. Now, if you want to select more object, for example, I want to select rectangle. I select the red one, then I can press Shift and I can select the yellow one. And as you can see, I selected these two rectangle. I can also select the blue one with shift and left click and shift and left click on the green one. I selected all the rectangle. I can resize with, for example, shift and control if I want to keep the proportion from the center, as you can see, and all my rectangle are now selected. All the rectangle are now selected as you can see. If you want to deselect, you can just press Escape, scape is going to work. Or if I select again, you can just click outside, it's going to work also. You can also work with a frame of selection. To work with a frame of selection, you arrive here and you stay left click and when you stay left click, you can create a frame of selection just like this. In Scribus, you need to be around all the object to select all the objects. Sometime in some software, just to touch the object. In Scribus, it is to surround all the object. So I will go left click and if I stay left click here, I can select these two rectangle because I was around. If I want to select all the rectangle, I stay left click and I create a frame of selection like this and I can select all the rectangles, as you can see. So now we can have more options as well. When you go in the Edit panels here, you can find select H Advanced select L and deselect. So for this something that I will do, I will play this rectangle here, this one, here, this one, here, this one, here. And I will click on I will create two circle. So we'll go here and default shape will create a first circle maybe here, and I will define colors, these red colors, and I will create another this time ellipse with the ratio, and in color, I will define in color. I will define this blue color just like that. So now you can find edit select. So if you click on select or Control A, all the object will be selected as you can see. If you go in Edit, you have Advanced Select All, and here it is interesting because you have the panels, and you can select on current page, current layers on the scratch space. So if you select on current page, it will be impact on this page, and I have only one page and you can define what attribute you want to have. For example, it can be by color. Sometimes if you have a lot of things, it can be interesting. And for example, I can use field colors, and this is the color that I was using. For example, I want to select only the blue shapes. I can click on blue. I will validate and that's it. I selected my two blue shapes, for example. Let's continue. I will go on edit Advance select Hall. And I would like to select, for example, by the item types. And the item types, I would like, for example, it can be a text, image, a shape, polyline, lines, symbol. For example, if I select shapes because I only have shapes as you can see, he defines all the shapes just like this. But you can apply also more options. You can click on Advanced Select All, and it can be, for example, shapes. And inside the shapes, I would like, for example, the red color, and inside the red color, I can complete with something more line wines or print ember, or resizable or not. So you can apply multiple attributes. And after if I do this type of work, I have selected these two objects, as you can see, these 21, just like that. So this is the type of thing that you can do, and sometimes it is convenient. Don't forget that you can also deselect all when you go and edit and you have the possibility to just deselect all. You have every time the different shortcut Control A, Control A t A, and Control Shift A. And if I click on Deselect, I will obtain this vendor, as you can see. So this is how we can work with the selection. I all the element to delete a selection, delete a selected Obj or all the selected obje, you can just press delete on the keyboard and you will be able to delete like this. 8. Create shapes part 1: We are going to see how to create shapes. And for this, we can use these tools, and here we can create different type of shapes. We have first this type of simple shapes that we can create. We have also arrows. We can create flow chart, we can see jig saw, and we can find specials. So first in the default shapes, I will select first one, the rectangles. And when I click on the rectangles, I will just ragging and moving. So when you go left click, you stay left click, you can dragging and moving to create, for example, your first shapes. These shapes, if you want to adjust the size after you can resize clicking on one of the handles and dragging and moving on one of the handles. You have also the possibility when you double click to edit the different and Shark Point. But here, for example, you can do something like this, something like this, and you can adjust the different and Sharp Point, and it's possible. If I just come back with my undo panels, I will just come back with my original shapes just like this. You want to resize your shapes proportionally, you press control, and when you press control, you can keep the proportion. When you press shift, you will resize from the center depending of the handles that you choose. You can resize from the center. And if you press shift and control, you can keep the proportion and you can resize from the center. So Shift and control, keep the proportion and resize from the center as well. So after to understand these different type of options, you will go in the properties panels on the top right corners. So these property panels, you have different options. The first option is xyz axis. And concretely, you have the name of the shapes, and you can change the position of the X axis, and we can change the position on the y axis. Then we can adjust the white. So for example, I can adjust the white here. If I want to have shapes with 160 millimeter, I can tap 160 millimeter wide. If I want to have eight, 100 millimeter, I can tap 100 millimeter eight, and we can also crator rotation. So first, I will decrease the white, then I will change the eight as well. And if I want to crator rotation, I can change the rotation value here. I tap 20 degrees, I will turn with 20 degrees. If I tape 30 degrees, I will turn with 30 degrees depending on the base point. The base point is located on the top left corners, but we can change the position of the left point. If I click here, the base point will be now in the center. So if I decide to turn, I will turn from this different center point. If I place the point in the bottom right corner here and I decide to turn, the shape will turn directly from the center point. Extremely important to understand the position of the base point. So after to understand that on each shape, you have more options. First, something important is the colors and the line. When you click on colors, just here, you can select the colors that you want. We'll have the possibility to create more colors. If we want to add a straw, you can activate stroke here, you define a color. But here I don't see almost anything for simple reason that I need to apply a line, so I will click on lines here, and online, you can change the line wide and I can adjust the line wine, for example, here. If I want to deactivate this, you can deactivate just on the stroke, click on no, but you will still see this one even if it's in transparency. So I'll just click online, and online, I will have to decrease to what we call airline, just like this. So this one it is about the color. On each shape, you can also address the transparency. So here we have the possibility to change the transparency. We have a different adding line color to transparency and this one for the transparency of the shapes. And when you click on this area, you can decrease the transparency until, for example, zero. So this one is just to decrease the transparency. And if I come back, I will obtain 100%. Here, transparency, colors, line. You can also edit the shapes. When you click here, you can go and edit and you can have access to the different Sharp Point, I will explain more in details after because it is a transformation panels and also a way to adjust the different and sharp point. You can also double click to have access to these panels. The last possibility is to have the drop shadow. So you can click on Drop Shadow and you can activate a drop shadow here. And when you click on this area, you can define a drop shadow. This drop shadow, you can work with offset offset on the x axis and offset on the Y axis as well. You can define the value of blue less or more Blu. You can also define a color. If you want a different color, you can switch for a different color. So as you can see, you can make an interesting effect in a very fast way, you can also adjust, for example, the shad value, and you can adjust also the opacity value of your shadow. You can also use what we call content cover drop shadows and inherit object transparency. But in this type of case, it's not extremely useful in this type of case. So let's just come back with 100% here and I will go back with 100% here. If I want to deactivate the drop shadow, I can just click here and I will deactivate the drop shadow. So after to do this type of work, this is how we can create a rectangle, and it works for any type of shape. I will throw you with a circle and after we will show you in a fast way to different shapes. If I create a circle, it is same. You can just create ellipse in a fast way with left click. But if you want to stay from with a perfect ratio, you can press control, and with control, you can keep the ratio just like this. After to understand that, we can go on the right. It is same. We have the properties, one more times the position on the X position on the y axis. You can also change the wide and the eight, if I want 100, I can take 100. You can also activate the ratio just on the right if you need. And if I want to break the ratio, I can also just scale this. It is same. We can create a rotation depending on the char point. And if I want to come back to here, I can come back to this char point. While more time, we can adjust the shapes, colors. If I want to adjust the colors, I can switch for different colors. We have also the possibility to apply feel none and to only apply a strap color. I can define a strap color like red. I define line, and on the line options, we can just change the value of the line just like this. And we can also don't apply the colors inside and only on the line. So it is also a possibility. If I just click here, I will just switch on this area, come back with colors. And after to come back with colors, I will stroke, I will deactivate. As you can see, we don't have any stroke anymore, and I will go and fill and I will change for the blue colors. So this is how we can start with shapes after I'm going to show you more options. And it's convenient to have different type of tools, and you have a lot of possibilities to create simple shapes. 9. Create shapes part 2: We are going to continue with the shapes. We have seen how to create shapes and something that we are going to do it is to continue. I will zoom here, and we have seen that we can create, for example, rectangle. We have seen that we can create circles. If you want to create more shapes, you have different type of options. So for example, if you want to create something like a circle like this or Alf circle, you can do something here. You can press control, but if you press control, you won't have a perfect ratio. So I can just do something like this and after I can drag and move this element. It is same like every time you will have the possibility to go on the X Y Z properties to change the position, you can also adjust the Y and adjust the eight or to create some rotation. You can also scale with the different value here and you can create this type of al circles. If you want, I will delete that to work on different levels. You can switch, for example, select this one, and if you select this one, you will be on these directions as you can see. You can also create different type of triangle. You have the triangle rectangles. And if you press control, you can keep the proportion. And I created rectangle t angles like this. I can break the proportion if I need. If for example, I want to place in a corner of the page. When you go on the page here, you have snap two grid snap two guide, snap two items. If you select Snap two guides, snap two guide will allow you to yes, snap two Guides will allow you to snap to the border of the page, for example, I can go here and I can snap to the border of the page. Then I can adjust if I want to size, just to create something like corners on this area, as you can see. This is the type of thing that we can do. We can also create something like a ring. So here we have a ring and we can create a ring on this area. This ring one more time, if I want, I can go on colors, and if I want to edit the colors, I can replace the color by another one just like this. As you can see, you can create multiple type of shapes. After what more type of shape you can create, you have various types of arrows as you can see. For example, I can select this one. So if I select this one, I will go left click here. And if you press Control, you can keep the proportion. But after that, you can adjust. For example, I can reduce my arrow here and extend on this direction. I can select the color as well. And more time you can go also fell stroke, define, for example, stroke colors. Let's apply black. I will then go on fill options. I will deactivate the fill, and I will go on the line value to, for example, define airline, and you can craft something without any color inside, but only outlines colors, just like this. So after to do this type of work, if I want to come back, I will switch, and I will define airlines. I will go here, and I will go on stroke none, feel, for example, blue, and I created this blue arrow. When you have something like this, you can go in the properties. So here we have one more time XYZ properties. You have also some parameter of the shapes, and you need to understand that for some shape, you can add rounded corner. It's not the case, I forgot to show you, but when you create, for example, rectangles, I'm going to create rectangles here. For it to show you when you create your rectangles and you go in the shape panels, the shape panels will be interesting when you want to wrap text around the shapes because you have text flow. But it's interesting also here because you can add rounded corner with a positive value or a negative value if you go inside. So as you can see, you can create rounded corner like this. So positive value, or I can also create a negative value just kicking here. So in this type of case, if I want to add rounded corner with something like this, as you can see, you have this possibility. So let's just come back on this area, so it works for this one. If you click on this area and you see like shapes, as you can see, it's not possible to crack rounded corner for this one. I will zoom little out and I will press delete. What type of other type of shapes you can create? Oops. When you go here, you have different types of arrow, up to you, you can take a look at more options. You have the flowchart, sometimes interesting, you can create something like a flag, for example, and as you can see, it's pretty good. I can create this flag. One more time I have some options. I will go on the colors and I can define colors just like this. Don't forget that when you double click, you have also the possibility to have access to the nods option and I can adjust. For example, I can move this one or I can move this one or I can move this one. So we can adjust our shapes after that. So this one it is for the different hard value, flow shot. You have also some jigsaw, and sometime it is useful. It depends about what we want to do. We don't use this too much, but you can, for example, let's take a look about one and you can add multiple like this, and sometimes it can be pretty convenient. We can just replace with the color just like that. One more time, double click, and I can have access also to the different sharp point if I want to edit. Then the last type of shape that we can create, you have some special, just some symbols. So you have the herd symbol, I will press control to keep the properties, and I will define maybe these colors. Then the or one that you can use, it is a flower, so I can create flower just like this, and I will define the yellow color. The der one that you can create can be, for example, the symbol with a face just like this, and I will define the blue colors. And the last one in special will be this one. The penguin and I will place here, and I will increase the size, and I will just change the color for my disease. Don't forget that you can edit each time. So you can, for example, I will show you more details after, but double click and you can edit each and sharp point. You can take and Sharp Point. And you can drag and move. You can also adjust with more options. And, this is the type of things that you can do if you want to adjust your shape. You have the flower. I can double click. And if I wanted to adjust the position of so point, I can do this. I will show you after more details because you can also edit the handles, not only the point. By default, this is a point, but you can edit the handles. But I don't want to give you too many things at the beginning because after it's too much, so we'll see that in details after here it is same. You can, for example, dragging and moving this one. Dragging and moving this one as well. So we can adjust at our convenience. We can also add more points if we need. And if I double click here, it is same as you can see, I have multiple points, and it is the same. I can just dragging and moving, and as you can see, we can also double click and have access to the different entre point, and we can make some transformation one more time, just like this. And each time it is the same way. So you create shapes. You can go one left click to edit the shapes, a second left click to edit and sharp point, just like this. And when you go on the right, so to left click and you can edit. And when you go on the right, you have the properties. You select shape properties XYZ, axis drop shadow, shape, lines, color, and transparency. 10. Create polygons: We're going to see how to create polygons. For this, we can use these tools, and this tool is a polygon tool. When you click on these tools, you can create a polygon. You can just start and you can press control to keep the proportion. If you don't press control, you will break the proportion. If you want to have the same wide and head you can press control. And you can create this type of polygons. You want to adjust more in detail your polygons, you will have the possibility to go into properties, and when you go in the properties, you will have more options. So in the properties, you can change the number of corners. For example, if I want to create an older one, I can change the number of corner here. And if I want to have eight, I can also create some rotation. You can see the preview on this area, and you can also dragging and moving here to create your rotation, just like that. After to do this type of work, we can also apply a factor if we want to create a star. But first, let's create another polygon with eight side. If I come back to the polygons after it's every time the same, you can go to the property panels. And to the property pants, we can change the position on the x axis Y axis. I can also define a wide. So if I want to increase 120, and here I want 120, I can put 100 2,120. Here, we have a rotation, and I can change the rotation. For example, I can put 40 degrees if I need. The base point is on the top, as you can see, so this is why I turn like this. After if I want to have access to the colors, I will click on colors here. We can change one more time the colors of the shapes. And if I want to apply a stroke, I can go and feel. I will define stroke here, and I will change for maybe some green colors. I will go on the stroke option with lines, and I will increase the stroke if I need, and I will switch airline for another ones, like, for example, a value, just like this. So this is how we can work. If I want to remove the stroke, I will come back to airlines and after I will select just colors. And on the colors features, just here, I will go on stroke and no. And this is how we can create polygons. If I just click here, you can also break the proportion of the polygons. At any moment, you can just select handles and you can break the proportion. You can also resize with control, and if you press shift, you can resize keeping the proportion. Let's press delete and press delete. Something that you can do also in the property panel, it is to create something like a stars. So to create a star, you can apply factors. And here you can create factors inside or you can go also outside like this. So this one is a factor. You can apply a percentage, and we can apply your inner rotation. So it means you can also turn like this, as you can see. So it's possible to turn like this. If I want to come back at zero, I can come back at zero inner curvature, if you want to increase with curs and curvature. You can make something like a flower if you tape curvature as well. You can also if you want to have a perfect star, you can switch for five, but you can also create this type of element with only sweep. Let's create 81 more time, and I will just validate and left click and I will press Control to keep the proportion and I will cred this element. Something interesting also. So I can change the color. I will go in colors, and in colors, I will define another one, like, for example, hoops among colors. I would like to change the field and I will select Magenta. After to select Magenta, what I will do I will also have the possibility if you double click to have access to the polygon properties. So it is another interesting way. When you create this type of shapes, you can also go on the properties with double click. Or if you select with double click, you can go in the property or if you go in the shape option here, can also define edit and you can have a polycon property. So here we cannot edit directly the point. You can directly work here and you have the first point, and with the first point, you can create a rotation. You have the second point, you can work with a factor here with a second point, but you can turn also as well to create inner rotation. As you can see, you can move here and here, you can create inner rotation and apply a factor. All the parameter, you can edit again here. If I want to change the number of corners one more time, if I want to adjust again the rotation, if I want to apply a factor, I can one more time adjust but even after. So even if you create a shape, after you want to edit this shape, as you can see, it's possible with these different parameters, and you can do this after. Let's come back to zero, zero in a rotation. Maybe I will put zero as well. And the factor will be something like this. I can now apply some er curvature like maybe want to create something like the flower. I can do something here, and the inner curvature, maybe we can keep this one. But something I can do it is a factor, and I will increase little bits of factors and I will create something like this. And as you can see, I can create this element and I can resize after if I want with control. So this is how we can create polygons. Okay 11. Create arcs: We're going to see how to create arcs and for this, we can use these tools. This is the arc tools. After to click on these tools, I can zoom a little bit on this area. And I can start arc. If I want to keep the proportion, you press control, and thanks to that, you can keep the proportion, so it means the same wide and the same eight, just like that. After that, one more time, you can have the basic parameters. So it means when you click on the colors, you can change the colors. If you want to add a stroke, you can click on Stroke, you can activate stroke colors, and you can go on the line options to increase with the value of the stroke. You can also even have the possibility to remove the color inside, as I explained before. I want to remove the stroke, I will deactivate for airlines and after I will come back to the colors stroke, and I will apply none. Now I created this shape, but how to edit this shape. First, if you just click here as you can see, you cannot edit directly. Something that I will do because if I just click here, I can just create another one just like that as you can see. Something that we can do it is to edit, and to edit, you can double click. When you double click, you will enter in the Edit arc options. And this panel, if you want to extend a little bit, you can extend a little bit. Have different option corresponding to the different handles. First, I will change the color because the handles are in blue, so I will just change the stroke for noon and feel for red. It will be pretty better. So now double click. You can find one handle, second, third, and four handles. You have four point or four handles if you prefer corresponding of the elements that we have on the right. Concretely, I can drag in I can change the start angles here. I can change also the end angles so we can decrease or increase the size. Here we have the eight, so I can increase the eight and I can change the white. If I want to keep the proportion, I just need to put the same value. So for example, I can recuperate 120, and here I can recuperate 120 as well. So now what I can do, I have the possibility to go on this area and I can drag and moving here. So with this one, I can dragging and moving, as you can see. So you can also change an angle with this one, and you can change the start angles with this one as well. Now something that you can do also, you can use the point. It means you can use this point and this point is just the wide, and this point is just eight. If you move these two point, generally will break the proportion. If I want to recover proportion, I need to adjust the proportion again on this area just like that. If I just click on hand, this is the type of thing that you can do. So it means if you want, for example, to cra Alf or a crater, I will click here, I will press Control and what I will do, I will double click and I will adjust. For example, the start angle is at 30. I change that start angle at 90 and the end angle at 270. And if I do something like this, you can have a perfect half circle, as you can see, just like that. You want to have a cart crater, you can put 90 and here you can put 180. And if I put 180, I can craft perfect crater. I can the edit then. I will select on the top here snap two guide. So thanks to that, I can snap to the border of my page and I can dragging and moving, for example, this element around here. And if I move, I will play this one, around this area, just like that. So after to do this work, I can change one more time the color. If I want to resize here, it will be pretty convenient to use control, and you can resize from this base. As you can see, we have this rectangle frame corresponding to if I scale like this, I will obtain this render. But if you scale from this point, in this case, if I scale with this print, oops, here it's not going to work properly. I'm going to come back at this moment. I just come back here, yes, I resize and it was not working properly in this case. I'm going to redo again. I'm going to slip one more time tools, and I will click here, I will double click. So I will tap one more times 90, and here I will tap one more times 180. I will end the edit. I will play the element around here and yes. Now if I only move this one, only move these handles, I can increase and I can stay fixed on this area. But I need to now if I move a second time, as you can see, it's going to be not extremely convenient. But the first time is going to be convenient. And after that, I can have this option. I can double click again. And if I want to adjust, I can adjust again with another value and we can recuperate something like this. Here, I can take 120 or more, 100 maybe 200 and we can do something like this. I can reduce only 400 and that's it. So this is how we can create arc. 12. Create spirals: We're going to see how to create spirals. And for this, we can use this tool. This is a spiral tools. I will zoom here, and I will click on the spiral tools, and I will start with left click. And if you want to keep the proportion, you need to press Control. And with control, you can keep the proportion same wide and same eight. After I will place my element around here and after to place my element around here, I have the possibility to go on the right. So after to ground the right here, it's not extremely interesting to fill with a color because if I just ground colors, you can use fill, but you will obtain something like this. So generally, we don't use fill color too much. And generally, I will only use stroke. So I will deactivate the field colors. I will click on the stroke and on the stroke, we will activate color. We can change the color as you can see. But in this case, I will stay in black. Then I will go on the line options, and on the line options, we will define a value. So here I can define a value, and maybe I will define a value of 2 millimeters, just like that. Maybe two is too much will work with one. So now you can find the different properties here one more time. How to edit more the properties, you can double click. And when you double click, you can upturn this render. So it means you can drag and move, for example, your element here, and when you double click, you can also extend little BDS panel even if it's not extremely useful. And something that you can do it is to work with the start angles. So this one is a start angle so you can change. As you can see, you can change the position. Uh, the start angle, if you put in a negative value, it's not going to work. So you cannot put in a negative value these start angles. You can type start angles. For example, I will start maybe at 20 degrees. I will tap 20 degrees hoops and double click. I will double click again and you have angles. Concretely, if you multiply 360 degrees to complete turn, you can define your number of turns. So here we have 1,800, so we can find almost see turns. If I just if I just decrease, for example, I just tap something like 800. And I will go left click here, as you can see, we have less term. And if I want to craft more term, I will tape maybe 2000. I will tap 2000, and I will click here to validate, as you can see, we have more turns. So you can multiply 260 degrees by a number that you want and you will obtain a render. You have the factor. This is a space between the different codes. So here we can change the space more from the center like this, or we can change the factor more outside, just like that. And we can do something like this. Don't forget that you can also edit inside. So to edit inside, you can just go left click here and you can also change inside like this. And here you can left click again and you can also change with this one. It is also a possibility and I can continue. I can continue with more angle just like that, and I can change the factor one more time, as you can see. It is also something important, and I can change maybe and start more around this area. If I click on edit, I can do something like this. This is how you can create spearll. So you click here. Generally, you press Control because generally, you will keep the proportion and you will obtain this render. So double click and I can edit. One more time I will make something a little bit more inside, maybe, yes. Maybe just hoops sometimes it's not extremely convenient. Yes, maybe I will do something like this. And this one I can take this point as well. Something that I will do also, I'll click on edit. When you go in the line features here, you have the possibility so I can change for maybe one millimeters, but I have the possibility also to change the type of the line, and I can change for this one, this one, or this one, or I can change with multiple ones, as you can see, maybe this one as well as here. And as you can see, I will obtain this render. So you can change the style of the line, and depending on the style that you choose, you can obtain different type of renders. When you edit this type of shapes, you can go on shapes also and edit. And if you go on shapes, edit, it is like to do double click. So generally, double click is more convenient to use, but you can use this one as well. So we don't use a spiral too much, but sometimes it can be convenient. Generally, you keep the proportion because if you break the proportion like this, you will obtain this type of render. So generally, it's more convenient to keep the proportion, as you can see, or double click, and I will obtain this render. So it's okay for the spirals. Something that I'm going to do is to click on the spirals and I will press delete on the keyboard, and we are okay with this tool. 13. Create lines: We're going to see how to crat lines. And for this, we can use this tool. This is the line tools. Something that I'm going to do it is to zoom little bit here, and I will click on the line tools. To rato line, you can just go left click and you stay Left click and you can dragging and moving a line as you can see. And for example, you can stop the left click. You can have information about the angle and the length as you can see in millimeter in degrees, and you stop the left click to Crato Line. You have also the possibility to create horizontal, vertical or constraint every 15 degrees. For this, you can use these tools if you want to create a perfect horizontal line, you stay left click and you press control. And when you press Control, you can apply your constraint every 15 degrees. For example, zero, 15, 30, 45, 60, 75, 90. So you can apply some constraint like this. In this case, I will constrain to angle zero degrees and I will stop the lef click. And I will continue. I will crat ano der line. I will go here, and I will crat anorline. I will press control to this time apply 90 degrees, to this time apply 90 degrees, 270 degrees in this case. And I will continue. I will crat nor lines, I will go here, and I will tap 270 degrees as well, just like that. And as you can see, this is the type of things that you can do. And at any moment, you can click on the line. And the line you can select the first point. So it means you have this point, and you can drag and moving the first point. And you have this print and you can dragging and moving the second point. So for example, I can dragging and moving these lines as well. I can click on this one, and I can adjust. I will crack anoor once, I will go here. And I will create an oder once, maybe on these directions, as you can see, I will select an oder once, and maybe I will create anoder one with control on these directions, and I will create anoerOce around this direction, and we can apply some constraint as you can see. When you have a line, you can address the properties. So concretely, because it's not shape, as you can see, you cannot adjust the shape properties. But something that you can do it is to work with the line. So line and color of the line. So if you click on color here, you can define stroke. If you go and feel, you can select any color, it's not going to change anything. But if you select stroke, you can define the color. For example, here, put color in red as you can see. I will go on the options on the line, and on the line, I can increase the line wide. So here we can change the line wide. We can also change the style type of line we can put with multiple types of options, as you can see. And if I just go to the option here when I zoom little bit here, you can find the final end just like that. And this one correspond to the end. Flat cap, we can use square cap. In this case, sometimes you can zoom in and zoom out to see the update. As you can see the square tap is a little bit outside. So this one is anchor point and we are a little bit outside. You can use also the wound cap. And when you use the wound cap just like this, you zoom in, zoom out and you can see here these options and we can crack wounded at the end, wounded ending, just like that. After you have more options, I will explain more in details after because you have also more options. You can come back to flat. You can zoom in zoom out. You can also generate some arrow, so it means you can just click here and you can create a type of arrow at the beginning, you can create a square as well. So you have different types of options, and at the end, it is same. You can also create some arrow. But you can use a scaling value. So it means I can just apply a scaling value of 20% and here 20%. You need to zoom in Zoom out to have the preview, and as you can see, I can create arrow just like that. So as you can see, it's also convenient to do. You can create arrow with a base of a line. It's pretty good and you have different type of options that you can use on the start arrow and on the end arrow. One more time if I want to change the colors, I can just come back here, and I will define the colors. Like for example, I will come back in black, as you can see, I created this arrow, and I can resize if I want after with my move tools just like this. And we can create some rotation as well. But you can see, multiple type of options that we can do. If you select, for example, two lines or more lines, I'm going to show you I will delete, and I will select all this line. So if, for example, I select all these lines and I go on the line options, and I want to increase, you can increase the size of all the lines at the same time. So it's also something important to know. You can increase the size of multiple lines at the same time. You just need to crate to selection. And here we don't need to create a group, I just need to crate a selection, for example. I will click one more time on the line too, so I will crack oder once here and I will press Control one more time, and I will select all the lines. I will go here, and we will define the same size. Maybe I will define two and I will validate. Is how we can crack lines so as you can see, it's convenient. You need to understand the constraint and to understand that you can edit the line with the different lines options. Let's select all the lines and press delete on the keyboard. 14. Draw with pen: We are going to see how to create curves. And for this, we can use these tools to create curves. And I'm going to zoom here this is the paint tools, and thanks to that, we can create curves. So first, if you just want to create segment, no care. You can just go left click to place the first point, then left click to place the second point. And as long you just put one left click, you can just create multiple point places. If you want to finish your pass, you can just press escape and you can just create a pass like this. Sometime you need to zoom in zoom out to really see your pass like that. Don't try to close. It's not extremely nice in Scribus, it means if you want to create something close, you can not directly close like this in Scribus. You can just place an element and you can just feel if you need. I'm going to show you. First, when you create a segment like this, you can click on this element. If you want to adjust, you will be able to double click and to have access to the sharp point, and in this case, you can dragging and moving the sharp point. But you have more options, I will explain more in details in separate sessions. Here it is same, I can click and validate and I can double click here, and as you can see, you can move. If you make something a little bit faster, you can have a little curve. So this is why we obtain this render. Now, if you just go left click on this area, you can have access to colors. If you apply a field color, you obtain something like this, so it's not extremely convenient. If I remove the field color, I will go on the stroke, and on the stroke, you can apply any colors, and you can also go on the line options, and on the line option, you can change the line white. For example, I can change the line white just like this. And you can also change the type of lines and have more options just here. After to do this one, if for example, I click on this one, or maybe this one I will change the line for this one. If I click on this one, I want to fill, it will automatically fill on this area. So what does it mean? It means that I can go around this area and I can select just a few colors. And if I go like this, I can fill in this way. Now let's select this element, press delete and this element press delete. If you want to create a curves, you have the possibility to click on the Basier curve tools, and if you want to create a curve, you don't start with Left click here, another Left click and you stay Left click. And when you stay Left click, you can have the possibility to dragging and moving on a direction. For example, I can move here to create curves. Then I will continue to place another point. Left click here, I stay Left click, and I move on a direction to start a curves. Uh, if you have used another graphic software and you use a pen tools, it works at the opposite when you're dragging and moving the mouse when you want to crack a cures and I can do something like this. Then I can go here, Left click and I can dragging and moving. When I'm satisfied on the curve, I can stop the left click and you can continue like this. If you just press escape, you will be able to validate. I'm going to show you way. We click Left click. Left click here. I stay Left click, I start my curves. Then I can stop the left click. Left click again, I start my curves and do something here. Then I can go on this area. Left click, I start my curve. Here, left click, I start another curve, and I stop the left click and you need to train if you want to use well these tools, just like that. Yeah, even if I don't close, I can just press escape. I will be able to fill. If you double click on element, you can dragging and moving handles just like this if you need. So I can dragging and moving handles. If you want to edit this one, you need to switch for move Control Point and move Control Point, you can move this one. So here you move the point with this one, and here you move the control point, so it means this handle. So this is the two main options that we can have here. So if I just validate. So one more time, I can click on this one, and if I want to go on the stroke, I can edit the stroke. If I want to go on the line options, I can adjust the size of the line if I need. If I click on this one, I can do the same thing, but if I apply fill, it's also a possibility. So it means if you go fill, you can also fill like this here. So now what I'm going to do, I'm going to select everything and just delete. Something that I will do, I will go on this option here. And on the options, we will use directly Snap to guide, and I will use the pain tools. And something that I can do, you can create, for example, first element like this around here, then another one around here and I can just create another point around here. Little bit outside like this. And even if you don't close here, you can just press Escape and finish your work like this. So it means I didn't create the line to close here. I don't have any line. And if I just go on the field options, I can just activate color and I will obtain this render. I can go on the stroke option and I will activate none. So now if I just zoom and I decide to double click here, I can adjust my point. So it means you can drag and move the point because you are using here snap to guide, you can snap the point to the edge of the page, just like that. Here at this s I can take this point and I can now snap to the corner of my page and we can do something like this. Here. Then I will little out and I will select this one, and I will dragging and moving on this direction, just like that. And I will select this one and I can just snap to the corner of the page. As you can see, even if you don't close, you have the possibility to do this type of transformation. And if I just valid it, I can create this element on the base of the page. Even if we can create a rectangle to do the same type of work as well. And I can double click and adjust again. So this is something important to understand. And it works for any type of thing, so it means you can also lobs bezier curves. You can maybe start around this area. Then here, and then I can go left click here and I can crap to curves. Then left click and I can crap to curves like this, and then left click and I can crap too curves like this. Then I can come back here and if I just press scape, I can just fill with fill options and I can fill like that. I can go on stroke, I can click on none, and after I can adjust, so I can double click, can adjust, for example, this point just here, I can maybe adjust this point just here. So we can adjust in this way. This another way to process this point here, and I will adjust this point on this area just like that. I can also click here and we can adjust this point on this direction. Then we come back to the point tools and we can adjust. Even if you have more options to adjust, I will explain just after how you can adjust more. Thanks to that, we can create this on the top, and we can create this on the bottom. Let's click here, press delete. Let's click here, press delete, and after we explain how to edit the point. 15. Draw with pencil: We're going to see how to draw with freehand. And for this, we can use these tools. This is freehand tools. And thanks to that, we can create lines with freehand. So something we can do it is to click on these tools. This is a freehand lines. And as you can see, you have something like pencil that you can use, small symbol like a pencil, and you can just go left click and you can in a free way create something like this. So you just click on the tools and after to click on the tools, you can just create in a free way anything that you want. But when you click after, if you want to edit the shore Point, you double click, and you will have a multitude of shop point depending on what you do. So here, for example, you have a multitude of Ish point. If I double click on this one, I have less show point for the simple reason that I was doing something pretty more fast. So I'm going to show you again. If you use this one and you make something little bit small, a little bit long just like this, you will have a lot of sharp point, as you can see. But if you make something pretty fast, you sell these tools. And for example, I do something like this very fast. As you can see, you will have less sharp point. You have also the possibility when you have a element, so you double click, just like a line that you can crack. You go on the right here and on the right, what we can do, we can edit as I explained the sharp point, and you can also edit the handle so you can click on the handle so it means the pink element. So you need to understand that the node is the blue point, and the control point is the pink point or the purple point, if you prefer, just take that. So after to do this type of work, you can find shapes, line, color, transparency. So if you click on color, it is the same. Every time if you click on feel, as you can see in this case, it's not going to be very interesting. So I'm going to put none, and I will activate a stroke. And a stroke, I will define, for example, a green color. If I want to edit the line options, I will go into line options and we can increase the sickness, but we can change also the ending or we can also change the type of lines if we need the ending of the line whites that we can put. And that's it. So after to do this type of work, I will double click here, and this is not a tool that we use too much. You can use this tool if you want to make something pretty fast, for example, something like a sketch, you can crap a layer, you just crap a sketch. And if you want to give a notation information about something, you can use this one. For example, you can use these tools, you can use a freehand tools, and you can type something. I can tape just something like this. And I will come back with these tools, freehand, and I will tell just something here, freehand. And every time I will repeat my freehand tools like this hoops I just tap something like Titan. Each time you need to re create the tool. So if you prefer you can use a shortcut F, it will be pretty more convenient sometimes. And you can just, for example, use a friend tools, and I can just crat something like this. So I just something if you want to craft something sketch in a fast way, sometimes it can be interesting. If you want maybe to draw something fast, it's going to be interesting as well. You can click on the freehand tools. Just like this, you can do something here. For example, you can use this tool again, can create curves here. I can continue with these tools and I can create curves like this. If you press Control, you can reduce the number of points. So for example, here press control, and as you can see, I have only this number of point. So if you press control, you can reduce the number of point. With control, for example, you can make something smooth and pretty better. So don't hesitate to use control. Here, for example, I'm using control. I'm going to show you again. Here I'm going to use control, and as you can see, at the end, we have something smooth. Double click, I have only a few ino point because I was using control. So if you want to make something pretty better about your curves, you can press control. I'm going to show you again. I will do something here. And as you can see, I have a nice curve because I was using control. I'm going to show you again. I will go here, and I will do something like this. I press Control, and as you can see, it's a little bit different. So don't hesitate to press Control. You can click here and I will do something here. I will do something here one more time. I will click on this area, something here and click on this area, something here. Now, if I double click, as you can see, we have very few on Sharp Point. Very few on Sharp Point because I press Control, and because of this, we can obtain this render. And I can adjust after the different endles, I can adjust more points if I need. This is the type of thing that we can do. 16. Draw with curves: We're going to see how to draw with calligraphy. And for this, we can use these tools. This is a calligraphy tools, and concretely, you can create lines with calligraphy. For this, I will zoom a little bit around here. And first, I will click on the tools, and I will just create something. So the first way, you can just going to create a curve just like this, and I will obtur this type of render. I'm going to click again here and I will create another one just like this. If you double click, you will realize that you have different and sharp points, but you need to understand that you will have something like stroke. So for example, if I zoom here, as you can see, we have the stroke on this area. So we can fill with a color. I'm going to show you. So if I want to fill with a color here, I can fill and use at the same time the stroke. So if I go in color, fill, as you can see, if I change the color, it will be applied directly here. So it's not directly only hotlines. It is we can fill inside and we can also add a stroke. So I can click on Stroke. I can select, for example, these blue colors. And now if I go in the line option, we can also apply some sickness here, as you can see. So this is something important to understand. Here it's different that when you create two lines or when you create two line with freehand, it is different because we can feel inside and we have also a stroke, so we can work with the two ones. I will come back here with airlines, and after that, I will come back with colors. So here with the colors, you can feel all your shapes just like this. So now this is some bicycle. If you want to edit, you just double click, and when you double click, you can have access to the shop point. And for example, I can adjust like this to change, for example, the sickness if I need, here, maybe I can extend and reduce like that, and here, maybe I can extend and on this area adjust as well. So we can adjust just like this. Here. So this is the type of thing that we can do. Don't forget, I'm going to press delete on the keyboard for this one and press delete on the keyboard for this one. The calligraphy tools can be pretty interesting also when you stay left click here, you can work with angle and a white. So for example, if I apply angle of 20, you will see a little bit of difference. I will click on these tools and I will go left click here. And because I put 20, I will have more difference between this part, this part, and for example, the other part. Because we are using 20. Something that you can use also, I'm going to come back to zero. It is a wide, and you can also increase the wide on decrease if I put maybe 20 just like that, and I'm using these tools. As you can see, we'll have more sickness. At the opposite, I can reduce. I can click here, and at the opposite, I can reduce if I apply something like only four, and I click on these tools, as you can see, we will have something smaller. This is why it can be interesting. You can when you do this type of thing, you can, for example, create something like a symbol. So I will click on this area and maybe I can create a symbol. I will create something here. Then I will click on the tools again, and I will create something here. As you can see, if you want to create specific symbols, you can use this type of tools. For example, I will do something here. I will click on this tool, something here, and I will do something on this area, and I will do this again, just like that. But sometimes you need to change, for example, the sickness. You can select element like that. You can adjust the position. You can also scale if you need or I can select all this element like that, and you can change the position. As you can see, it's pretty convenient. If you want to draw little bit, you can also use these tools. I can increase a little bit the number for maybe eight, and I will be able to click on my tools. And as I explained before, you can also use these tools if you want to try to draw little bit something with freehand. You can also use these tools as well, as you can see. So it is another way to process. So it is interesting tools, definitely that you can use these calligraphy tools. I will click on this one and I will do something like this. You can use for different way. If you want to create a notation, it can be also interesting. So it means you can one more time, use these tools, and you can, for example, create something here, then you come back and you can create something like this to define. But even in this case, it's not extremely interesting. So maybe in this case, it's pretty better to create a first line. And then to create, for example, say on line. But depending on the angle, it depends because if I create on these directions, as you can see, it's not going to be extremely good because of the angles. We can do something like this as well. Like, for example, this one, it's not extremely convenient. You can select also multiple element. At the same time, you can adjust the color here. And so I can do something like this. Here, it's for the stroke color, but I can put stroke no, I can put another one for the field option, but in this case, as you can see, it's filled like this. So this is why you need to be careful as well. So yes, sometimes you can have this type of trouble. Oh, this is a type of thing that we can do. I'm going to, yes, just come back here, come back here. Let's put black, and now it's not convenient because as you can see, they feel this one. And yes, so definitely sometime you can have this type of troubles. So it's okay for that. This is how you can use these calligraphy tools. 17. Create groups: We're going to see how to create groups. For this, something that I'm going to do it is to create rectangles. I will click here and I will generate rectangles. We'll create the first rectangles will go on the right here. And in the color panels we define a first color. I will define, for example, the blue color. Then we'll create another rectangles here. We'll define the green colors, we'll crataner one on this area with the yellow colors, and we'll create maybe another smaller one here, and we will define the magenta colors. So I have these different elements. To group, you can select the entities that you want. I can create a frame of selections around all the rectangle or you can press shift, and I can select all the rectangle in the same way. Cato group, you have multiple way. Right click, we can define group or Control G. I can go also on the top and I can use Edit options. And when we go in the not edit option, when we go in the item options, we can also generate groups. So we have groups here and groups or Control G. After that, we have to group. The first interest of the group is just to transformation to all group. You can go one left click. You can select all the group. You can, for example, scale all the group as well. The only thing is when you go on the right, as you can see, it's not possible to edit the colors of all groups or the lines of A group. But you can, for example, apply the different type of transformation that we have here. You can also scale the group at your convenience and use these different type of options. This is the first interest of the group. You want to select one element of the group, if you double click, as you can see, it's not possible. So how you can process for this, you can use panels. You can go on Window here, and I Window, you can find different options like, for example, Outlines. When you click on Outlines, just like this, my outlines will arrive on the right. It is a summary of all the object and everything that you have on your document. For example, all the element, I have Document one, here, this is the master page normals and I have one page. Inside, you can see all the elements that compose your document. I have a polygon, this one, this one, this one, and this one, and inside the group that we have created. And if I select one polygons, I can select only one polygons here and I can, for example, scale on this one. If I need, I can go into properties as well, go into color panels, and I will define another color, for example. So when you go in this one, you can adjust one element at your convenience. And for this, you can use outline panels and you can seal it any element just like that. Now to ungroup, you select your group, you can go right click and you can find ungroup just like that. And thanks to that now, I have only all the polygon in independent way. So the outline panels, I'm going to remove, but can be interesting in some case. Let's see a second example. Another interest can be to work with the alignment and the distribution. First, I will select another rectangle just like that. I will create a rectangles on the top here, and on the properties panels will define the red color. I will zoom a little bit, and inside the rectangles, I will define a default shapes like circles. And I will create circles around here, and the circles I will go on the color panels, and I will define the white color, and I will place the circle here. I can center this circle. This, we can open directly in window. We can open hinge and distribute panels. It will appear on this area. Can select the circle, shift the red rectangles, and relative to the frost selected, for example, Zola selected for the rectangles, we can define center particle and center horizontal. Then I will duplicate this circle with control D and with Control D, I can duplicate, just like that. Control D, I will duplicate again, and Control D I will duplicate again, and Control D I will duplicate again. So if I want, I can adjust, select all the circle with shift to work with the distribution, and here in the alignment panels, we can define, for example, Mdals and we can distribute here and in distribute, we can use this one. Distribute center equidntHrizontal. Now, if, for example, I want to center all this circle inside my red rectangle, I need to create a group because if I don't create a group and I use my eigen panels, I click on center, all the circle will arrive in the center, and this is not what I want to do. So this is why I need to create a group. So I will select all the circle. For example, the first word, I will shift, the second, the third, and the fourth, just like this. And I will go right click and I will generate a group of Control G. So now I generated the groups and because I have a groups, I can move all my groups, and now I can center all my groups here. So for example, I can click on the group, shift the red rectangles, and I can click on Center and center here because I have a group here. I can craft another group, so it means I can select all this element. And I will go right click and I will create two groups. And now, as you can see, I have a complete groups. You can also, one more time go on the Window panels. You can open outlines. And when you go on the right here, you select outlines, and you can see we have a first group. So it means we have this one and inside, I have a second groups inside as well, just like that. This is why it is useful. And even this group, as you can see, I can move. If for example, I want to scale to group, I can scale to group, I can make different type of thing. If I need to ungroups, I will go right click and I can ungroup or control hip k, and I will ungroup this one and I can recuperate this group. If I want to now ungroup this one, I will go right click as well. I will go on ungroups and I will recuperate all my different polygons. And as you can see, we can have six polygons. So another very important interest of the group is to be able to work with the alignment and distribution. And when you have multiple element, if you want to work properly, you need to work with groups in other interesting way. So something that we will do we select all these elements here, we'll press delete, and it's okay with the groups. If you want to remove this, this is a panel that you can keep every time, but you can also just open when you need. 18. Duplicate objects: We're going to see how to duplicate object. So for this, I will create a rectangle. And I will create the rectangles here. This rectangle will keep these red colors. To duplicate object, you have different type of options. One of the first option it is to press Control D, and when you press Control D on the keyboard, you can, as you can see, duplicate an object. And you can repeat Control D, you can duplicate again, and you can repeat with Control D. The first way to duplicate is just to use a shortcut Control D, and generally it's pretty convenient. If I select this rectangle, I will press delete on the keyboard and I will selt this one again. Another way is to go on item here and you can find duplicate also. I same it is like to press Control D, and you can just duplicate like this as well. It works for any type of element. If for example, I create a frame like textFrame, I will just go below, I will create a text frame like this, and I will double click to edit the content. I will go right click. With Right click, I can apply a sample text, and I will define some whatever we define I will define, for example, English, and I will just validate like that. And I have some text frame here with content. I want to duplicate this text frame, I can do the same thing. I can press Control D, and I can duplicate, as you can see. If you want to work with aligment, you just take a look here and you can use Snap two guides. You can use Snap two items, and thanks to that, if I move this, as you can see, I can go in the aligment on the left of this one. And I can press Control D, I can duplicate again, just like that. Or something that I can do also, it's to go item duplicate, and I can duplicate again, stay on the axis. So this is how you can duplicate. Now let's select all this element and press delete. We'll zoom a little bit again, and we will create another rectangles, just like that. Small rectangle here. Something that we can do also when you go on the top here, IMs, you can find multiple duplicate or Control Shift D, and thanks to that, you can open these panels. And you can create, for example, just copy, you define the number. You can create a copy with a gap between the item or shift created item. If you create a gap, you can work with, for example, a horizontal gap, and if I define maybe something like 20, I can duplicate with four and horizontal gap with 20 millimeter. I can repeat in this way. But you can also have multiple options. For example, when you click on multiple duplicate, you can also put it can be horizontal, so I can put maybe just 16. I can put a vertical gap, maybe six and create also small rotation. Thanks to that, I can duplicate like this. I just duplicate it one time, but if I adjust with duplicate, multiple duplicate, if I adjust with more time, for example, four and I define maybe here 12, vertical, I define four and rotation maybe two, and if I just validate, I can duplicate like this. Another possibility it is when you go on item duplicate, multiple duplicate. Another possibility will be to use shift created item between. And thanks to that, you can define a number or we define four and you can apply a horizontal shift, but also a vertical shift. And you can also create a rotation. And when you click here, you can obtain this render. If you want to have more space between the element, you can just increase the value, and you can just increase the value because if the value is not extremely high, like for example, just here, you will duplicate like this. Okay. So something we can do also another way when you duplicate and use multiple transform here. It is by row and columns. So you can define a number of rows. You can define the number of columns. Maybe I can define eight and here four, and you can define a horizontal gap and vertical gap. If I do something like this, I will repeat in this way. And as you can see, it can be pretty convenient. You can create a grid or something like this. And when you go in the item features, you select multiple duplicate. So this is how you can craft the grid. And maybe rose define six. Here I can increase, maybe define 12 and horizontal gap, I will define maybe ten, and here we define maybe ten. And we just validate and I can repeat in this way. Maybe I could invert the value to repeat in another way. But as you can see, it's pretty convenient. And the last possibility when you use this one would be to use by page, and you can use following page, following even, but page ran page. This one is a little bit specific. We're going to focus by the two first one. If I come back here, maybe we can make more value on this area 12 and this one maybe six. Horizontal gap may be eight and vertical gap maybe eight as well. If I just validate, as you can see, I can create this type of thing. For example, after that, select all the elements and right click, I can create to groups and thanks to that, I can move the groups and if I want to move the group in the center of my page, I can, for example, go on the window features. In the Window features, I will use hanning and distribute and when I go on the right, what I will do, I will apply inhaling and distribute panels relative to the page and I will define center and center just like that. But you can see this is how you can duplicate and don't forget that when you go on the top here, you can use duplicate, you go on the top, you can find duplicate. But you have also multiple duplicate if you want to crack some repetition and it is a convenient way to earn time depending on the work that you want to do. Let's remove this one. I will also close these panels, and it's okay on how to duplicate. 19. Edit points: We're going to see how to edit points. We have the possibility to edit points, so it means to edit the so point. First, it works when you work on shapes and then when you work, for example, on something like a pass when you use paint tools. Let's first create a default shape. It works for any type of default shape here. I will show you with a rectangle, so I will create a rectangle first, and I will show you also with a circle, so I will click on the circle tools, and I will create a circle with control to keep the propulsion. Zoom on this rectangle first. When I zoom as these rectangles, to edit the point, you have to option first option, double click, and you can have access to the not panels. Second option, you go on shapes here, and you click on Edit, and you can have access to these knot panels, as you can see. So after to do this type of work, you have the possibility to move node. So here, this is a move node. When you are in the move node, you can just take a point and you can just move like this. You take a point and you can move the different point just like that. Here, you can move the control point, but the control point are when you have curves. But even if you use move control point, the handle will start here and you can dragging and moving like this on a direction and the second one on a direction to create a curve just like this. And here, it is say if I wanted to create a curve, I can move this one here and I can move this one here. Now if you want to add a nod or point, you come back here and you can click on Plus Add a nodes. And when you arrive close to, for example, a line like this, you just go Left click and you can add a nod Left click and you can add a nod. Now if I click on Move Point, as you can see, I can move this point or I can move this one as well. If you want to remove a nod, you click on Minus and you select the node that you want to remove and you can remove a nod that can remove this one or remove this one as well. Here, this is the different options that you can use. Now if I click on the circle, it is same, I can double click on the circles. And as you can see, we can move the point just like this, this one. And if I want to move the handles, I click here. Move Control Point. When you move Control Point, by default, you use Move control point independently. But you can use symmetrical. If you use symmetrical, you move the handle on the right. On the left, it's going to move in a symmetrical way. So as you can see, it's convenient. But if you use, for example, this one by default, move Control point independently. As you can see, you can move only this one, and you can move only this one to adjust in a different way, as you can see. So this is the type of thing that we can do. So after to understand that we have opened polygons or close the BziR curve. I'm going to show you in another way. I will click here and I will press delete, and I will click here, I will press Delete. As I explained, you can write some curves with, for example, the bezier curves. And with the bezier curves, I will start here, left click. Then left click and I will stay left click to start to curves. Then I will go here, left click, and I will stay left click to create another curves. And I will go in this direction. Left click, I will stay left click to create no one, and then I will go here and I will stay left click to Cretano one. And I will press Escape. So I have this curve that can go into line options, and in the line option will define around a value of one. Maybe I can tap directly a value of one and I can keep the black color. So now I can edit my shapes with double click or edit here. And thanks to that, I can edit the point. So one more time, I can show you again, you can move the nod. So you can move a nod just like this. Or you can click here, move the Control point. So I can move the control point just like this. And if I want to activate symmetric, I can move the control point symmetric way. You have also the option here to sit the control point, and in this case, I will lose this one, as you can see, and I can crack curves again after. The same when you click on anything you have the possibility to sit. So you can, for example, double click. You can click to create two point, and I can create two point like this. And also create oder one, just like that. So you can add new point. And when you are here, you can rest the Control point as well, all the control point. And if I want to move, I can address the curve again. To remove a point, you can just click here. You can click on a point and you can remove Or I can click on this point, remove, click on this one, remove. And now I can come back to the curves and I can extend just like that. You have more options. You can invert all the pass. So this direction or this direction or put a symmetric way vertical horizontal. Note here, I make a mistake. It is s. So you can also when you use this one, for example, if I have a rectangle, it is also the possibility to crack some transformation. For example, when you click here, double click, you can use this one to apply a chair transformation on this direction or these directions. This type of thing, you can do this also with the knot tools. So you can apply this type of transformation. You can also flip, reduce the size just like this with a value of percentage that you can define. Sometime you can duplicate and increase and also on this direction in millimeter, if you prefer. If I just come back to this one, so it means double click here. I have also the possibility here we come back to this value. I have also the possibility to open a polycon. So when you click on open here, when you just go left click, you create a new point to create to cut. So it means if I open like this, now I can open, as you can see, and now I have so point and I can dragging and moving. So you can open a polycon like this. Also the possibility to close. So when you click on close, is base your curves. But the problem is it will close like that. So depending on the situation, it will be good or not. So if I select this one, I will double click. I can, for example, change I can, for example, change handles with this one, do something like this. Then we can just try and move. And now if I define to close, I will close like that. So in this case, it can be more convenient. And you can also invert apply chair. You can also change put some rotation here just a rotation value that you can apply as well. So as you can see, multiple types of interesting options that you can use. When you close here, it was not extremely useful to close as you can see in this area. They just click here and just click here. So every time Double click edit different and Shark Point, you can add new and Shark Point. You can remove and Sharp Point. You can also start handles, and it can be pretty convenient. Now what I will do, I will validate and I will delete these rectangles. 20. Master transformations part 1: We're going to see how to work with transformations. So for this, I will select the rectangle tools and we'll create a rectangle on this area. And after to plat rectangle on this area, we will see the transformation. First things to understand when you use the selection tools, you can transform your object. When you click here, you can scale on this area, this one scale on this area, you can dragging and moving the object. When you press shift, you can scale directly from the center. When you press shift, you can scale from the center like this or like this or also like this, you can scale from the center. And when you press control, you can keep the proportion just like that. When you press control, you can keep the proportion as you can see. If you want to scale from the center, and at the same time, you want to keep the proportion, you will press shift and control, and thanks to that, you can scale from the center with the right proportion. Say on things to understand when you go on the right, you will have the property panels, and as I explained before, you have the transformation panels, which means you can move on the x axis. You can move on the Y axis as well. You can define a wide and eight for your objects. So if you want to change, for example, the wide, I would like 120, I can tap 120. And if I want to tap 40, I can tap 40 and you can also create some rotation for your object. You can just click here, you can apply a value and I can create a rotation. This rotation will depend on the transformation points. If your transformation point is in the Mdals and you create the rotation, it will be different as you can see. This will have an impact directly. So you can create your rotation depending on this transformation point. If I double click, you can enter to edit the nod, and for example, I can move the node here or move this one or move this one. You have the possibility to edit the node when you double click here. If you just continue here, you can flip horizontally your object and you can flip vertically your object. Oh, I will delete this object and I will create another rectangles. Another thing that you can do it is when you go on the top here, you can find some item, duplicate transforms, and here you can find transforms. When you click on Transform, what you can do, you have the possibility to adjust with AD and you have scaling translation rotation, scaling. If you select scaling, for example, you can just define a value if I apply 120 and I just validate, I can scale with 120. But when you go on item, you select transforms. G on the right, just like this and you can add something. As you can see, the first value will be the scaling options and you can just change the value also on two axis here. You can scale from a base point just like this. And don't forget that you can also create copy. If, for example, I define to copy with this value and I click to validate, I created to copy as you can see. I have a first one, I can change, for example, the color just here, and I have a second one and I can change the color as well. And I have a third one, so it means this one, the original one. So it is another interesting way to transform. We delete this one and I will this one. When you go on transforms here, you select your object, items, transforms, you have also the possibility to generate a translation. Here, just pretty simple. You can generate any translation just like this horizontally and also vertical. If I put, for example, ten and ten, I can just crap translation. But you can also generate copy one more time. If I apply for copy, I can do something like this. And as you can see, I have first rectangle, the last rectangle, another one, another one, and another one. So it is another way to transform and you have multiple ways to transform as you can see. Let's delete this different element. Another thing that you can do in item here, duplicate transforms. You can click on transforms, and when you go and add, you can also create some rotation. You define the base 0.1 more time. Let's take an example center, and I will put 90 degrees and I will turn my object places. I will just come back and the last possibility that you can do when you go in transform here, it is to click on skewing, and here you can skew your object and you can define your value horizontally and vertically as well. I also breaks the proportion if you don't want to have the same value. If I just click here, I can do something like this for my object. But now it is useful, I'm going to show you something with a rotation, for example, I will create a default shapes we use the circle tools, and I will define circle around here. I will scale a little bit on these directions, and I will define the magenta color just like that. Now this element, I will create a rotation with copy. For this, I will go on item, duplicate transform and I will define transform. What we do add welc rotations in the rotation features, it depends about the number of copy. If for example, I apply value like six copy, I will have six entity. If I have six entity and I divide 260 degrees by six, I will obtain 60 degrees. This is why I will take, for example, 60 degrees. And six copy, I will change the base point from center to turn around the center. And if I just valid it, as you can see, I can create something like this. So I will define six copy with every time 160 degrees, and as you can see, we obtain this type of render. And if I just select, I can also generate to complete groups or rightly create two groups, and we can generate this type of element thanks to the rotation. After to understand that, you have the last possibility, you can use a default shape. So for example, I can crack a rectangle, a small rectangle here, and you can multiply the effing. What does it mean? It means you can select, for example, transforms. You can go here, you can define transforms. And when you click on ad, you can apply multiple elements at the same time. I can use, for example, scaling, but I can complete, I can use translation as well. I can use rotation and I can use skewing. For example, I remove skew, I can take on remove exes. I want to remove rotate, I can remove as well. If I want to add again, I can add again. And you can apply multiple things. For example, I would like 120 degrees. I would like a translation, maybe a translation of ten, and here a transtation of 12. I would like a rotation like ten degrees, and I would like a skew value like, for example, a value of ten here and maybe a value of 16 here. You can apply multiple transformation. Depending every time of the base point, and you can also create a copy if you need. For example, if I want some copy, I can also put more translation. So it means I can apply maybe 100 here and I can apply 100 here. I can define four copy and if I just validate. As you can see, I can multiply. Maybe it's a little too far because I put 100, but you can apply multiple transformation slices. So this is why it can be useful. This is the way to transform. You can transform directly your object like this. You can take a look also on the property panels here, and you can go on item duplicate transforms and you can have access to the transform panels. 21. Master transformations part 2: We're going to continue with the transformations. Now for this, we have seen how we can transform elements. So I will select rectangles one more time. And we have seen that when we have something like this, we have the possibility to use the selection tools and to scale, for example, and we have the possibility to go in the property panels in the X, Y, and Z axis to adjust with different geometry properties. We have seen also, I'm going to show you one more time. You can just go on this area. And when you go on this a item, you can find transforms. And with transforms, you have multiple way to transform. And you can use, for example, scaling. You can use a translation. You can use a rotation, and you can use queuing. One more times, I'm going to show you, I would like to use and to change the base point maybe from the center. I would like to scale a little bit. I will apply scale value like 110. With the proportion, I will translate a little bit. I will translate with maybe 10 millimeters or maybe ten is not enough. I will translate with 40 millimeter horizontal and 40 vertical. In the rotate angle, I will turn, let's apply ten degrees and on the skew value, I will apply maybe 12 and here, let's apply ten, for example. I would crat some copies. I'd crat maybe four copies. And if I just valid it, as you can see, you can crat repetition like this with multiple type of transformation. As you can see in some case, it can be interesting just like that. So after that, I will delete this one, delete this one, delete this one, did this one, we delete on the keyboard. Something that we can do. Also, when we are on this area, it is to double click here and we can edit the sharp point as I explained just like this, and we will be able to adjust the shoot. You know what I'm going to show you, it is another features. I will here and I will press delete, and I will recuperate to default shapes, and I will create another rectangles. You have also the possibility when you go on this area, you can find items, and when you go on items, you can find different types of tools. And here we have the past tools. In the past tools, you have what we call the mesh distortions. And thanks to that, you can make more advancing. L on mesh distortion, you can open these panels. When you open these panels, you can extend, for example, the size just like this of the panel. And you can see you have different points. So with a grid, you can deform your objects. For example, you can just first, you can zoom more if you want, and you can zoom in zoom out. So zoom in and zoom out just like this. After that, you can take a point. For example, I can take a point, and as you can see, if for example, you want to work with perspective, you can just dragging and moving this one, dragging and moving this one, you can dragging this one on this direction and dragging this one on this direction. You just click on and validate and you can deform your shapes just like this. I'm going to come back with my history panels just here. So yes, the problem is with the story panel, it's not going to work properly, so I will press delete and I will create another rectangles. Let's just go back to item here. I would select past tools, and I will define the mesh distortions. After to define the mesh distortion, here. We can adjust with different type of point. If I want to create something like a flag, I can, for example, taking this point and drag it moving here. But you can also adjust more with this point because you have point inside. So you have point outside and you have point inside. If you want to sit or, you just click on rest and you can sit to point. But not only a point because you can select multiple point. For example, you can create a frame of selection and select more than one point just like this, as you can see. You have also the possibility to select four points if you need. You have also the possibility to press control and to select two point as well. Oh, you can make multiple things as you can see. If you select point and you click on resit, you can sit the points that you select. In this case, I can also select point, rest, and I will come back. You can move multiple points. If you want to sit, you can create a frame of selection, select all the points, and just crap rest. If I want to crate something like a flag, I can, for example, move this point here. I can move this point like this. This one little bit here. This one maybe around this area. I can pull this one around here. This one maybe we can do something like this. And I can also take multiple point, maybe these two ones and adjust little bit like this. And that's it. If I just click and validate, I can obtain this render. And if you double click to edit share point, now what you can see, you can see that it's a little bit different. Cho each point has now two handles, and you can click here if you want to change the position of the handles or if you want to change the curves on the handle. After that, you can also adjust at your convenience with the different options that you have here. This is a fact. You know what I'm going to do, I'm going to delete this one and this one. Um, it works for every type of shape, so it means you can select, for example, circles. You can dragging and moving something like ellipse, just like that. I can increase little bit of size. And I will go on the options here, and I will define one more time items. I will select the past tools, and one more time we will define mesh distortions. At s I can adjust here as well. I can, for example, select these four elements, and as you can see, I can extend, maybe just like that or I can reduce like this. I can create a frame of selection of these two elements and I can, as you can see, change as well. So it is convenient. You can really adjust different Enders and thanks to that, you can make something really, really specific, just like this. And I can drag in and bring the different handles, as you can see. If I want to sit, I can select, sit, just like that. You can move any handles. You can also move the handles inside, as you can see. If you want to sit, don't search the handle. You can just create a frame of selection, select all the handles, and just click on, I'm going to Zoom litter out, can select all the handles like this and just click on resit. You can see, it's convenient. Finally, even if you have just basic shapes, after if you want to adjust more in details, the shapes, you can do something like this. You can do something like this here. And after to do this type of work, you have satisfied, I just validate, I can double click and you can see now we have multiple and sharp point created by simple reason that we make some change to these shapes. So now I have multiple points as you can see that I can adjust if I need, for example. And we just validate like that. So this is how we can work with transformation. 22. Master boolean operations part 1: We're going to see how to work with the boolean operation. For this, something that we are going to do it is to create a rectangle, so I will select the rectangle tools and we'll create rectangles on this area. At the same time, I will go on the page here and we activate Snap two guides and we will activate also Snap two items. Then I will zoom a little bit. We create also circles. I will select the circle tools. I will press Control to keep the proportions. We will change the colors in the color feature panels, and I will define the blue colors. And then we can play this circle around here, just like that, and we can snap in the mid. Oh, what is the boolean operation? The boolean operation is different type of additions that you can do with two shapes. In Scribus, you can only focus with two shapes. It's not possible to crab boolean operation with multiple shapes at the same time. You can focus only two shapes. How to crat boolean operation, you select the two shapes that you want with shift or frame of selection. In this case, I will craft a frame of selection, and I will go on the top corners just here, and you can find in items, you can select pass tools and pass operation pass tools pass operation. When I click on pass operation, the interesting thing is you have directly the preview. Correctly, the different operations are located here. You can use unit the shapes, substrate the second shape from the first. You can use intersection of the shapes. Result is the area where the two shapes do not intersect and break apart intersection and exclusions. Something that you can do, so you can see the first shapes, and you can see the second shapes and equal. So here the operation is unique. Concretely, when you do something like this, we only create one entity, and the result will take a color. So by default, this is the first shapes or the color of the second shapes, just like that. If I just validate, I have only one entity, and as you can see, only one entity is created. You can also, if I just come back to these panels to this way, you can go also on window and you can select outlines. Outlines will be the summary of everything that you have in your document. And here we have the two polygons. If, for example, I repeat the operations, I select the two polygons as you can see, and we will go on items. I will define pass tools, pass operation. I will do the same thing, but this time, I will use, for example, custom colors. And you can define a stroke so you can define stroke and you can also if you prefer define on an custom color, and I can select green. I have the red rectangle, the Blue circle, I cran one entity in green colors. If I just validate, I will obtain this render just like that. And as you can see, I only have one polygon. I think I forgot to switch the color. Let's just redo again. I will select items here, pass tools, pass operations, and I will select customs, I will define green, and I will just validate like that. The problem in some cases, sometimes it's not working properly. As you can see, the color is not adjusted properly in this case. It's a little strange in this case. If I go on the outline feature, it was just to show you I'm going to remove these panels, and I will undo with the last actions. So I will say the two entity. Another thing that you can do when you define directly items, pass tools, pass operation, you can also keep the first shapes and keep the second shapes if you need. And if I just validate, I have created this one, and I have my new shapes, this one. This is my base shapes. This one is my Odorma shapes and we have created this new one. So you can keep the original shapes if you need. Let's just delete this one, and I will just come back with these two shapes. I will zoom here and I will come back here. We are going to see the other Bolan operation. I will select all this object and I will go one more time on items. I will select pass tools and pass operation. What we will do is the second type of operation is substract and we can subtract the second shapes from the first. When I click here, I will remove the circle to the rectangles. And when I just valid it, as you can see, we have removed the circles to the rectangles. This is the type of boolean operation. I'm going to select all this one. I will come back on items, pass tools, pass operation. The other one is this one. Intersection of the shapes. Ccretly you have the intersection of the two shapes, and the result in this case will be like Alf circles. If I just validate, I will have the element at the intersection of the two shapes. Another boolean operation, I'm going to select and I will go directly on items here. I will go directly on the pass tools and I will define pass operations. When I click on pass operation just like this, I have the possibility to adjust and for this, the er one will be this one. You will remove the area at the intersection of the two shapes. If I validate, I can remove this area at the intersection of the two shapes. And if I just come back, the last boolean operation, let's grab a selection of two entity one more time, and I will define one more time here items. I will define one more time, pass operations. And the last boolean operation will be break apart. And concretely, you can separate in three part. So you have one part, the last part, and the part has the intersection, and everything will be brick and will be brick. Concretely, if I just validate, what we can see, we can see this half circle. We can see these other half circles, and we can see this part as well. I'm going to show you a concrete example, and as you can see one more time when you use the boolean operation, sometimes you can make more advent shapes. This is the way to process when you want to work with Boland operation. So concretely, you have different type of way to use. After I'm going to show you concrete example, at this moment, I will select all the different object and I will press delete on the keyboard. 23. Master boolean operations part 2: We're going to continue with the Boolean operation. So we have seen how to use the boolean operation. We're going to make concrete example. For this, I will select the rectangle tool, so I will crack a rectangle on this area one more time, and I will zoom on this rectangle. We'll adjust little bit this rectangle, we scale around here, and I will scale a little bit here. Then what I will do, I will add on the top here, I will select default shapes, and I will create a triangle, this type of triangle. I will start a triangle without the proportions, and I will place the triangle on the top just like this. Now, what I would like to do it is to create a union between the two shapes. Maybe I can extend a little bit here. For this, I will select the two shapes, and after to select the two shapes, I will go on items, pass tools, pass operation, and I will click on we have Keep and keep. I will just go in the operation Union. I will take the color of the four shapes and I will just validate and I will obtain this random. So as you can see now, we have only one element, just like that. I will create another rectangles. I'll create another rectangles, maybe rectangles around here, I will change the colors, and I will work with another color like the blue color. I will place this rectangle in the middle just like that. Now I would like to substrate this rectangle from this union, these shapes. I will select the two entity one more time. I will go in the items features here. I re clic pass tools, and we will use one more time pass operation. This time, I will use substrate I will substrate the second shape to the first shapes, and I will obtain this render. I will just validate, and as you can see, I will obtain this render. I will repeat this operation with another rectangle maybe here. These rectangles, I will adjust with maybe the yellow color just like that. I think I can scale little bit here, and I will play this rectangle around this area, oops this area. So after to do this type of work, I will select I will define a color, color, let's apply the green color. I will select the two entity, and I will go on items, I will select the past tools. I will go in the past operations, and I will define here sutra, substrate the second shape from the first shapes. And thanks to that, I will obtain this render. But case, in this case, I could use also this one intersections, and intersection will work properly, and I will just validate and I will obtain this render as you can see. And if I want to continue, I can continue. I can create the fault shapes the rectangles. Let's grab the small rectangles here and place this one on this area. As you can see, it's a little bit difficult to snap here. I cannot snap, now it's going to work. And I will just adjust a little bit maybe this area and this area like this. I will define another color first and I will duplicate with Control D, and we will place another one like that. I need to zoom and two snap on this area. You know what I will do, I will select this entity and this blue rectangle is the first one, and I will go on item pass tools, pass operations, and we will use operation unit, the shapes. And I will take the color from the first shape. So it means red color, and I will validate. And I will repeat this process. I will click on this one, click on this one, and I will go on item pass tools, pass operations, and I will use for shapes plus union, and I will just validate. Something is wrong. It's a little strange. Let's select all, and I will go on Edit. I will define items. I will define pass tools, pass operations, and I think something is wrong. It's a little strange. I will obtain this render. So why I will obtain this render? I think it's because maybe this one is not on the top. I'm going to come back with my history panel. Something is a little strang. I think maybe the objects are not perfectly on. I'm going to move a little bit of object here. Let's try again. I will click on this one, shift, click on this one, blue rectangle, and I will go on items. I will take the pass tools, pass operations, and we'll do these operations, and I will do something like this. Then we'll seck the two ones. I will go on items, pass tools, pass operations. And I will obtain this. Yes, now it's going to work. I think maybe an element was not perfectly on the older one. And as you can see, you can create simple different type of things using this process. I would like to create something like a mod. And for this, I will select two circles. So we'll create the first circles on this area, I will create the first circles and I will press Control D to duplicate the circles and place another one. I will scale a little bit with shift to keep the proportion and to scale from the center shift control. So after to do this work, I have the possibility to place the circle around here. So we have the first one and we have the second one, just like that. Maybe I can change the color. I can define the blue or maybe the yellow for this one, and for this one, maybe the red. If it's too big, you can also scale little bit these second circles. And now what I will do, I will select the two circle just like this and I will go on the item features. I will select the pass tools and we will use the pass operation and we will define not intersection, this one. But the problem is, as you can see, um, this is not exactly what I want to do. Something that we can do it is to invert. Here you have the option because I want to be in the invert position. You can just click on Swap shapes and when you swap shapes, you can invert the shapes. As you can see, I can obtain the surrender and this is what I want. I will select the color of the floor shape. So you can switch like this. Don't forget that when you double click here, you will have multiple sharp point created. In this case, I have multiple sharp point crated and if you want to adjust inshPoint, we can adjust in sharp point, as you can see. So this is something important to know. Here it is same. I'm going to validate if I double click on this one, different end sharp point will be created depending on what we have. F this, I have, for example, this enra point and if I want to drag and moving, if I want to dragon move this one or dragon move this one, we can dragon and moving as well. After you will have multiple enshra points as you can see. No, it's okay this is how to work with a boolean operation. 24. Master alignments: We are going to see how to work with aligment. So for this, something that we can do, we will create your rectangles and we will place rectangles around here, just like that. And for this rectangle, I will reduce a little bit of size. After to do this type of work, I will define the alignment and distribution panel. But just before, I just want to show you something. You can have on the page here, you can activate Snap to guide and snap to item. When you click on Snap to Guide, you can just snap to the edge of your page just like that, and you can place on the front area your object because you can snap to the border of the page. Now, if, for example, I have second rectangles, I create a second one, and the second one, I will go on the color features, and I will define another color like this blue color, as you can see. And instead of the moment where you activate Snap two items, you have the possibility to align this rectangle with the older one. For example, I can go here and I can find indication like what I'm in the same axis. If I create another one, for example, and create anor one here with a different colors, and as you can see, we can stay in the same alignment because we use a snapping option. I can also put this rectangle inside this one and I can put in the top left corner, we can snap. On this area, we can snap. You also put in the center on the rectangle. You can have information about the milder like this. You also snap like this in the milder or snap like this in the mider. But this is the first things to understand. I will remove this rectangle and remove this one. Now, if, for example, I deactivate Snap two guide and deactivate Snap two items. Something that we will do it is to go on Windows, and we can find the line and distribute panels. This panel you can open only when you want, or you can play this on the right every time if you prefer. It's up to you after it depends. I'm going to place at this moment on the right and place just here, and you have alignment distribution and swap the alignment panels. Something important is relative to concretely, you have different options. If I want to be relative to the page, Ilic page, and I can place my rectangle depending on the page. For example, Aileen by move resize, we're going to move. And if I go here, I can work horizontally, and I can go on the left of my page, here on the right of my page. But I can go also outside just like this or outside just like this. And this one is centered on vertical axis. And I can do the same thing horizontally on the top, on the bottom or outside bottom, outside top, just like that, and in the milder. So if I want to be in the top left corner on the page, I select left and top. If I want to be in the milder, for example, I select center and center horizontal and vertical axis because I'm relative to the page. Something important to understand also, we can work with alignment like this. And we're going to create an direct tangles. I'll create ano one, I will create another direct tangle just like this. This one I can increase little bit the size. And if I click on these rectangles, I will go in the property panels and in colors. I will go here. I start to do this type of work. I have the possibility when I go on the right, I will come back to the line distribute panels. You can also lg, for example, an element to another one. And for this, you need to change that. Just before to change that, I want to I'm going to click here and delete. I wanted to show you when you are, for example, in the document setup, if you have a margin, for example, you apply your margins, I will apply ten, validate the proportion. If you have a margin, instead to use a page, you can use margin. It works also for guides and selection. You click on margin, you can do the same thing. You click on the rectangle, but the alignment will be on the margin. I can go on top here and the top in comparison of the margin and the mi dal as well, just like that and here on the back. You can just place depending on the margin. If now I come back, I will go on file. I will save the document setup and into document setup in the margins, I will define zero, activate, apply change, and validate. Now if I have a seven tangles, if shapes, I will crack another one, I will go into property s panels and in the color features, we define blue. If I just come back to in and distribute, I can play this small rectangle here. So if I don't use the snapping options, something that we can do is we can select the red rectangle and the blue rectangle. And if I just go on the right here, I can change, for example, the first selective, the red rectangle. I can do the same thing. But this time, the base is the red rectangles, as you can see. And you can also, for example, de selct if you selct the blue rectangle and then the red rectangle, you can switch for less selective. If I want to go on the left, I can go on the left on the right, and you can go also outside of the shape just like this or outside like this, and I can come back to myps. This is something important to understand. Now you can also work with your element when you have multiple elements. For example, I have this one, I can press Control D, then Control D, and then Control D. Acidic, for example, this rectangle shift, this one, this one, and this one. This one is the first selected. So I can align to the first selected, for example, in this case on the top, and we can align like this. At the same time, I can place this rectangle here, this one here, and this one here, for example, and I can duplicate also. I will press Control D, and I will press Control D. And I will select this different rectangle. If I want to align to, for example, this one, I will select this one first or at the end. I selected this one first, I will go on the right. I will select relative to the first selective, and I will go on the right side, just like that. And on the right side, I can just g here. And after I will explain how you can use the distribution. At any moment, you can select your panel, you can drag and move outside, or you can close the panel at any moment. 25. Master distribution: We're going to see the distributions. This is something that we are going to do to see the distribution, we will create rectangles. We'll create the rectangles and we will place the rectangles around here. So to see the distribution, I will place the first rectangle around this area and I will duplicate with Control D, just like this, and I will duplicate with Control D again, and I will duplicate with Control D. So we have seen how to work with alignment. So first, you can just click on this area and you can open the align and distribute panels. Now, it's going to be placed on the right, but as you can see, you can also, as I explained, dragging and moving these panels on this area. Web the alignment and you can see the distribution as well. Distribution, what is this? It is to have the space properly between each element. So it means concretely the same space between each element. So first, I will ing. I will select the first rectangle, the second, the third and the fourth one. And in the adding panels, I will put relative to the first selective and I will select top just like that. Now if I want to have the same space between this, this and this, I will complete with distribute. And with distribute, we can work vertically or horizontally, and here I need to work horizontally. In this case, if you select this one, or I just come back, you select this one. All these option in this case, will have the same will have the same effect. So all the option will have the same space. Concretely, you can start with this one here from the beginning, this one from the center, this one from the end, and this one space between each area. And most of the time, you will use this one from the midle and it's going to work toward the same space here, here and here. Now something that you can do also is you can also compete to have the same space between the left of the page and the right of the page. For this, you can find also this option. Make horizontal gap between items and sides of page equal. And you also on this area, make horizontal gaps between items and sides of page margins equal. This one will be when you use the margins and this one with a page. Concretely, if I select this and I click on this ara, I have not only the same space here, here and here, but also on the left and also on the right of the page. So you have the same space here. Here, here, here, and here. If you was using a margin, if you were using margins, you can also use with margins, and it's going to work properly as well. Now, you can do the same type of things if you want to, for example, work on these directions. So I can crack multiple rectangles like this, and I will continue with Control D, Control D again, control D again, and I will duplicate another times Control D again. Now what we will do, I will zoom out and I will create a realm of selection just like this. I will create a complete frame of selections. After to do this type of work, I will align to the left. But if I want to align to a specific element, like, for example, this rectangle, I will select this one first and I will select all the other one with shift. And because I selected this one first in the alignment panels, I can use relative to, for example, we will use relative to the first selected, and we will click on, for example, left, just like that. You have something like swap, so it means sometimes it can be useful in this type of case. When you use swap, it's not going to be interesting. I'm in goma to the Align panel. So I will slick left like that. Oops, I forgot to select my first object. So this one shift, this one, this one, this one, this one, this one, this one, and this one, and I will use Allen left. Now I will be able to distribute as well. And now we'll focus on this one. Distribute bottom eccental center equidistance, distribute top equidistance, make vertical gap between time, it equal. In all these type of case, I can select any type of element. In this type of case, we'll have the same render. In a few case, it will be different. But in this time we'll have the same render. So what I will use, I will use distribute center ecdntaly vertically. And thanks to that if I click on this area, something that we use most will have the same space here, here, here, here, here, here and here. So now what I would like to do, I would like also to, for example, have the same space depending on the pages on the margins. If I want this depending on the pages, we can complete with this one. Make vertical gap between items and the top of the page and bottom of the page equal. And thanks to that, we have the same space here, here, here, here, here, here, here, here, and here as well. And if you were using a margin, it will be starting from the margin, clicking on this one. This case is not going to change anything for the simple reason. The simple reason that I don't have any margins just like this. This is how you can work with this. As you can see, it's pretty convenient to use the distribution and the alignment. So what I'm going to do, I will select all this element and I will press delete, and I will click on and distribute panels, and we will close this panel. So you can keep these panels at any moment if you prefer, but I prefer to not have too many panels at the same time. But if you want, you can keep the panels every time or you can open when you need, as I've explained before. 26. Add colors part 1: We're going to see how to work with colors. And for this, something that we can do it is to select rectangles and we'll create rectangles on this area. So how to work with colors, as I explained when you edit the properties, you can define the colors that you want when you create default shapes or anything like this. I decided to put the red color when I create any default shapes. Now, if I just go on the right, you can have the property panels, and in the property panels, we can define colors. When we open colors, I can just zoom little bit to have the possibility to change the colors. We have a palette, not many colors, but I will explain after how you can add colors. And for this, you can define what you want. So concretely, you can define the black color, the blue color, green color, yellow color. So you can adjust the color just like this. This one will be to fill the color. You can also fill with a gradient. I will explain after how you can crab gradient and you could fill with hatch as well. If you fill with hatch just like this, you can define the line color, for example, blue, the background color, for example, yellow, and you can do something like this. You can define a distance as you can see between the different lines. You can even work with angles to turn the line just like this, and you have also the type of lines and you can do something like that. This one is if you want to feel this arch. Now I will come back to H I will come back to singles and the angles will come back with zero degrees, for example, and here I will rest bi. Now what I'm going to do I will come back to the solid. If you want to apply a stroke, you can switch for stroke, and when you switch or stroke, it just the stroke mode. And in the stroke mode, you can find solid also and gradient on the stroke. If I define solid or the stroke, I can define a color. Let's apply blue. And if I want to see my stroke colors, I need to switch four lines. And when you switch four lines, you can define the line right here and I can define a color on the stroke just like this. If you want to remove the color inside, you come back to colors and you switch for fill and for fill you select null and you only apply a color on the stroke. So this is how you can use. If you use stroke, you can also apply non, like this fill I will go back with maybe the red color. And in the stroke, I will apply non, and I can come back to lines. And this one I will come back to airlines to remove affinity to stroke, just like that. On each color that you can create, you can find shade. It's like a transparency value of your colors, and you can decrease this transparency value. Oops, I'm on the stroke, so this is why it's not working properly. I'm going to come back and I will apply this to the fill options. And on the fill option, we can decrease the transparency of the colors as well, just like that. So we can decrease how the saturation, the saturation of the color will be applied just on this area. So that's it. After we have the fill mode, solid, and here we can use this type of colors. And it works for any type of shapes. For example, I can use a default shapes. I can write a circle here, and I can define some circle around this area. And I can repeat the same type of things. Concretely, if I want to color, I will go and fill and I can define the color that I want on this area. If I want to add a stroke, I will click on Stroke. I will activate colors. I will select, for example, green, and after to select the green color, I will go on the line options, and on the line options, I can define what I want here. If I want to remove now the color inside, I can go back to colors here. And in the colors feature, I will go and field and I will activate none. And this is how you can process, for example. If now I recuperate colors, I will recuperate something like red or something like blue, and I will come back to lines. And on the lines, I will decrease line wide of zero. So it means airlines. And then when I go on colors here, I will define directly yes, the colors and inside the colors, I will go in the field options and in the field options. In the stroke option, I will define none, and I can definitely remove all the stroke colors. And now I will come back to fill and I can change again my color is here. So this is how we can work with color, as you can see. You have these different type options. So it is how we can work with colors as you can see. After we explain that it's possible to extend this palette because as you can see, it's not extremely convenient in Scribus because we don't have directly color wheel with the axis of all the colors. You need to create your own palette if you want to have more colors, and it's not extremely convenient in Scribus or this one. So something that we will do will remove these shapes and we will remove these shapes as well. I 27. Add colors part 2: We are going to continue with the colors. We have seen how to add colors, and we are going to see how we can create more colors. And for this, I will select rectangles. I will crept rectangles on this area. And this rectangle, as I explained before, we can go into property s panels, and here we have colors and we can change the color. The problem is we don't have many color here. So if we want to have more options, how we can process. To have access to more options, you go on this area and you can find in the edit properties, you can find colors and colors and fills. Thanks to that, you can open these panels. You can extend the panels if you need, and you have the possibility to create more colors. To create more colors, you click on at here and you can create. For example, I don't have any orange colors. What I can do, I can tape name, orange first. Here you can select the color models. In this care, you are going to keep CMYK, but we can change as well, and you can search in the color wheel and create colors. We define, for example, in the color wheel first, but you can also search a color in multiple elements. For example, you can search color for one of the palettes that they propose to you here. You have multiple types of palettes and as you can see, you can directly create a base with one of the element of the multiple palettes that we can have access just on this area. So when you click here, you can have access to multiple path. You have also a Scribus. This one is a palette original of Scribus, as you can see, and you have access to multiple types of basic on this area options, and this one is the original palette of Scribus as you can see. This is the first thing. You can define a color of one of the palette here or something you can do it just to come back a color map and you can select the color that you want with one of the palette and ANGB mode here. If you select CMYK, you will have CM Y and value on this area. And don't forget that when, for example, you use a K value, it's more to darker your colors just like this. You can also work in percentage on the right. So I have, for example, this orange color, and I can validate like this. I created orange color just like this. For example, I don't have brown. So if I don't have brown, I will click on add and I will replace the name by brown, just like this. And I will search a brand color. By example, I will go close to orange. I will make something little bit darker here. And with this one, I will make something darker. And thanks to that, I can crat a brown. If I want to create another green, something darker green, I can click add, and I will replace that and I will tape green dark after to take green dark, I will select a green color like this, maybe I can select this type of green color and I will make something a little bit darker on this area and I will validate. I created another color green dark. As you can see, it can be interesting to work like this. If I want, for example, a dark red, I will click on ad here. I will select I will take red dark and I will define some red color here. And I will adjust the red color with something darker on this area, and I will just validate and I created another one. This is how you can create colors. And here, you can find ad on this area. When you are satisfied, you can click on Okay, and you can add this different color on this palette. So now if I see my rectangle or I can selict any type of order shape, for example, the circles, I can have access to this palette, and I created the prawn. I created the orange, I created the green dark, and I created also, for example, the orange, just like that, and the red dark. So this is how you can create your own palette. And you don't have directly access to this, and you need to go on the top left corner. So when you go here on this area, so every time edit, you can select colors and fips and you can address the palette Here you can find remove us. You need to be careful because if I see I work and I use only two colors here, all the other one even from the original Scribus palette will be removed. You need to be careful if you click on remove Nuss because you can have multiple colors remove on this area. Just like this. When I go on this ware, you can find a new color, so I can add again. But you can also create a new color from the base. For example, I can select Magenta. And if I click on duplicate, I can duplicate these colors, and we can duplicate like this or if I select, for example, der one, like yellow, I can duplicate these colors. And you can also adjust an existing color or adjust in color. If I click orange, for example, and I want to edit again, I just need to click edit and I can adjust my colors as well. And let's make something a little bit darker. I will just validate. And as you can see the color will change also here. This is another important things. If you use a color on different object, and after you adjust the color in the panels, it will be adjusted on the object. It's logical. So it is also something important to understand when you go and edit here. Silic color and feel. If you adjust the color here, it will be adjusted here as well. If you want to remove, you click on an element, you just click and delete and you can remove different color. So for example, what I have created, I want to remove, I want to remove brown, I can click and delete. If I want to remove my red dark, I can click to delete. Red dark, replace. But if you have an existing shape with a color, he's going to ask you to replace by another one. For example, I will replace by this one. And I have also blue on green dark that I have created so I can click and delete. If I have orange, I click and delete, it's going to ask because I have orange here and I can see it maybe green just like that. So this is also how you can work. And even existing colors that you have by default, you can delete, but you need to be careful when you do this. But just by date, as you can see, the two colors here have been adjusted because I deleted the down one. 28. Create gradients: We're going to see how to create gradients. So for this something that we are going to do it is to create rectangles. So we'll create rectangles, and I will zoom on these rectangles, and we will see how to create gradients. Well, let's extend a little bit on this direction and this direction. To create a gradient, you go on the right and you define colors. When you define colors on this area, you have the possibility to adjust the gradient. So it means you can switch the film mode, and you have different type of options. You can switch fill by gradient and fill by aches, for example. In this case, I will use gradient. When you click on gradient, you have the type of gradient that you can use linear, radial, conical, four colors, diamond, mesh, and ph mesh. I will use linear first, I will some little bit, and to define the color of your first point, you select the first point with left click and you define color here. For example, I can define the first blue. Then you select the second point, left click and you define a color, I will define, for example, yellow and gradient blue to yellow. Now you can change the position. For example, I select my blue point here. I'm at 0% and you can just change the position. But you can also select the second one and you can change the position in percentage just like this. If you want to make something faster, you just need to drag and move the point and it's pretty better thanks to that, you can adjust the gradient and make something closer just like this. I want to come back this 10 and this 1100 it's faster when we do something like this. You can find also something like the extend and I will show you it can be useful in a different way when you work with Strot. But first, before to do this, you have also the transparency. For example, this one is the yellow colors, and the yellow color, we can decrease the transparency. And if I put a zero, I can obtain this render as you can see. We can also decrease the shad value just like that. It's very close, but it's a little bit different just like this. Something that you can do if you want to create a gradient, transparent to colors, you select the second color. The second color will be the same that the first one. And then you decrease, for example, the transparency to zero, and you can move like this, thanks to that, you can create a gradient with a color to transparency. In this case, it is if you want to work with, for example, a gradient with transparency. If you decrease the shade, you can also do something like this and move this one and it's going to work. Oops, I added a point. I'm going to show you after how you can add a point and remove point. But let's just come back to 100%. Gradient with more point, you just go left click and you can add a new point with a position and you can define another colors. I can go left click again, define a new point and another colors. The last one I will define, for example, this color. And thanks to that, you can create a gradient with multiple point just like that. How to remove a point to remove a point, you just need to take a point and you go little bit below and the point will be removed. You go little bit below, you have minus appearing and the point will be move like this. To adjust the direction because as you can see, I cannot adjust the direction here. You can click on move vectors. When you click on move vectors, now if you Zoomtler, you can find this point and you can just directly move the gradient. You can move this point just like that. You can move this point to work with the angles as well. And thanks to that, this is a way that you can use to adjust your gradient, and it is convenient definitely. We can adjust the gradient like this. Here. And we can take this one and we can adjust as well on this area. This is how you can also have access to these panels, and you have the start point with the location in millimeters, start and end point on the X and Y axis. So you can also work for this if you want to give specific rand int, and you can also apply your skew value just like that. This is how you can change the position of your gradient. Can also apply your gradient on the stroke. So it means I can use stroke, and it is same, you can apply your gradient. And on the stroke, I will define maybe yellow. Here, I will define maybe green. I need to go on the line value and increase the airlines. And you can create a gradient also on the stroke, just like that. When you create a gradient on the stroke, as you can see, it's a little strange here. And this is why in extent you can switch for pad, and in this case, it's useful when you work with a stroke. So here you can switch for pad. It is same. You can work with a gradient, but this time on on the stroke, you can move the vectors, and it will apply on the stroke, as you can see. Now, if I don't want any gradient on the stroke, I will switch for maybe solid or just non, and I will go on the line options, and I will decrease for airlines just like that. This is a type of thing that we can do. After to do this type of work, we are struck, I will click on non, we fill and on fill, we will stay like that. I will click on the rectangle and press delete. You can also create type of gradient. I will create two circles just like this. And the circle, I will switch for colors. And in fill, I will define gradient. You can also create a radial gradient, and it is same. You can just hoops among the strokm fill, and I can select my second point, and I will define maybe yellow. You can also adjust the point, the first print, and the last point as you can see, you can extend like this. We can also add more points if you need. You can also work with conicals, four colors, diamond, mesh, and patch mesh. It works the same for everything. It's only that if you work with four color, you can define the four colors that you need here, for example, like this one or also maybe this one. And if you switch for move vector, you will have multiple types of handles, and you can dragging and moving handles at different way to adjust your gradient. So this is just something a little bit different to use here. I'm going to come back to radio. We use a lot radial just like that. So I define two colors. And one more time I can I can move the vector as well. And if I zoom little out, you can see this print and we can drag and moving this print just like that to change the position of my red colors here, I can craft something like a sphere with effect and I can reduce the size. You can work with the different coordinate, but I think it's pretty better to work directly with the print here sometimes and I can drag in and moving at my convenience and I will obtain this render. If I just click here and just validate this type of gradient. As you can see multiple way to create gradient one more time, very interesting. And for this, you will operate. You will operate everything in these panels. 29. Edit strokes: We're going to see how to work with strokes, and this is something that we're going to do. It is first to create a rectangle, we'll select the rectangle tools. We'll create rectangles here, and we will see how to edit strokes. So as I explained before, when you want to edit strokes, you can go on the property panels and here you can find lines you can edit the stroke from this. When you go on color first, when you go on colors, you can adjust the colors of your object, and here you can define a color for the stroke. So from this panel, you can adjust the color of the stroke. If for example, I want to have blue, I can switch from blue. But I see almost nothing for the simple reason that I need to go on lines, and from this, I will be able to edit the stroke. The first thing that you can do it is to define the line wide, and I put this on airlines, and you can define the size here in millimeters. Something interesting will be the edge. Endings will be interesting when you work with lines or something like this. And when you have a closed shape, you can work with edge. If I zoom little bit here, you can see the sharp point is located on this area, and we can change that for evil drain, and you can change that for roundy drains, just like that on the corner like this. And if you want to come back to meter drain, you can come back to meter drains. Now, something that I can do it is to reduce a little bit the line white. I can reduce a little bit to line white like maybe two. And you can change the type of line clicking here, and you have multiple types of options that you can use to adjust the line. Now we'll show you after with another example because you can make something with more advanced, it means custom. So I'm going to show you this after. So here you can change the type of line that you want. If you want to remove the stroke colors or just a stroke, you can have two options. First, you click on your shape, you can go on the line and you can come back to airlines. Yes, you can come back to airlines here with a value of zero. And when I go in the line features here, in the colors features, in the color features, something that I can do, I can click on Stroke and none and that's it. That's it. It's okay for that and I can recuperate color for to fill my rectangle like for example, this one. Now I'm going to delete this rectangle. And on this area, you can see you can use a line tool, for example. I will create a line, I will go left click here. You can press Control to constraint, for example, horizontally to generate this line. So first, I will go into struck and I will apply the black color. Then I will go on the line options, and on the line option, the base point, you have the endpoint as a base or the left point. So it means the first one. And one more time, I can change hoops. I was moving. One more time you can change here, this one. Something interesting, if I go at the end, you can see the ench point is located here. And here we can change heading or square cap. You can zoom in Zoom out to update or it's not going to be seen properly. And the entrre point is here and we have square cap, so we have cap outside like this. And you can switch for wound cap, and if you zoom in Zoom out, you can find the wounded cap on this area. So this is how you can finish if you need. I come back here, zoom in and zoom out. One more time, you can also have the possibility to work with arrow at the beginning at the end. For this, you can find start arrow. And I can define arrow, for example, at the beginning, like this. It's pretty big, but we can adjust after, and at the end, you can have multiple types of arrow as well, but it can be something different like a dot or like a line to inish like this, or it can be just also something like a square at the end. And something that I will do, you can define a percentage. So for example, you can increase, but you can also decrease with a percentage value. I can define maybe 30%. So I will tap 30, I will press Enter. You need to zoom in Zoom out to see the preview. And for the arrow, I will apply maybe 40 and I will press Enter and I can zoom in and zoom out. And thanks to that, you can create this type of arrow using this one. So it's also convenient. If you want to come back, you can click on nn, and here I can come back unknown. Now I will decrease a little bit of size. Something that I wanted to show you is you can, when you are on this area, define the type of baseline. So one more time, you have multiple type of options. And something that you can do it is in the type of line. You can go also on custom and you can create something like a sequence. So here is the size of your element, for example, I'm going to show you. So in the black area, this is the element that you have. You can also remove a point clicking here. So I can create a sequence with the black area will be the size of the dot and the wise area is a space, or I can reduce the wise area just like this. And as you can see, you can repeat proportionally. Now you can add more point to create a sequence, non proportional with another one here and another one here. And here, I can let maybe more space. And I can continue with something bigger and something maybe bigger here. As you can see, you can create sequence like this. And honestly, it's a very interesting features to adjust like that. If you want to remove multiple point, you can just drag in and moving on the back just like this, and it takes something important to know. You need to have at least two point. If I want to come back, I will define the customs and I will come back to this one. And I will press delete for this line. And it works for everything. So it means not only for the line, if you use these tools like the BziR curves, freehand live calligraphic or let's click on the BasiR curves, and we can go left click here, left click here, we stay left click, generate a curves, and then maybe left click here and generate curves on these directions. And if I press scape, I can validate my curves. And the same when you have a curves like this, you can use the same type of things. And one more time, you can define here. You can adjust just like that. With a size, you can adjust square cap. You can adjust one cap. So one more time, you can do the same type of work. You can also adjust with a start arrow and arrow the type of lines as well. So you can, one more time adjust just like this. And if I want to come back here, I will go on these directions and I will click on this ara. Just like that. It works for every type of element that you are going to use when you want to crack any curve of them. As you can see, you will be able to edit the stroke as well. I can also come back to the color stroke, and I can come back with different colors if I need for this element. So it's okay for that. This is how you can edit the strokes. This is how you can work with strokes. 30. Add images part 1: We're going to see how to add images. For this, something that we can do to add images, it is to go in this area and you can create image frame. But when you click here, is just when you want to insert image, you need to insert the image inside the frame. By default, you can go left click here, create a frame, and you can put image inside. To put the image inside the frame, you can just go right click here. And on this area, you can find get Image or Control A. And when you click on this area, I can search image on my computer. I have image with the title road and you can click here, you can have the preview on the right, and I will just double click to validate the image here. Now if you want to resize the image, it is important to understand that when you double click, you can jogging and moving the image inside the frame. The problem is the size. What we can do we have different options. When you go right click here, you can find adjust frame to image or adjust image to frame. So if you select, for example, adjust image to frame, you will obtain this render. The problem is if I double click here, I can move the image inside, but as you can see, the side is not enough big, so it's not going to be interesting. When you go right click, you can also adjust the frame to the image, and the frame will be adjusted to the image, just like that. It's not the best way to work. The best way to work concretely, it's to go on Window here and you need to open the content property panels. These content property panels will be switched depending on what you use. If you use the image, you click here, it will switch to image properties. As you can see, this is content property. You select the frame image property now when it stacks X properties. Now you can click on image properties and the best way to you have, for example, your frame and the best way to adjust your image, it is to go on image properties and you select two frame size and then you switch for free scaling. After to switch for free scaling, you have the proportion like that, and you can increase the proportion like this. You can also break the proportion, but if you break the proportion, generally it's not good for image. I'm going to recu the proportion with maybe 20 and here we recuperate with 20. You can use also X DPI, but Y DPI, it is the same way. I just to in what you prefer to use. But I'm going to repres the proportion. Generally, the percentage is the best. So you increase a little bit of size, and when you are satisfied, you double click and you can take the part that you want inside the frame, just like that. Don't forget that when you because when you go in this area, you can select, for example, a default shapes, any default shapes, and you can convert these shapes. For example, I can create the ellipse here, and this ellipse, I can convert to a frame. And how to do this, you can go right click and you have Convert to, and you can find image frame. So you can convert any shape to image frame, and this will be converted to this one. And now if I want to integrate the image one more time, I will go right click, I will define get image. And on G image, I will select another one. I will select the image with Ocean, I will double click here, and I will repeat the process. First, I will use two frame size just like this. Then free scaling, and as you can see, we can reduce or increase the size. In this case, I will increase little bit of size and when I'm arrive inside all the circle, I can double click here and I can drag and move the image inside to really take the part that I want and I can just validate like this. And when you have any shapes, for example, I have these shapes or I have this shape, you can convert the shapes. When you go in the image properties here, you can also switch for properties. And when you switch for properties, you have the shape options. And here you can convert your shapes, and you can use default shapes. You can select, for example, and convert to triangles, you can convert to half circles, you can convert to this one. So you can have multiple options to convert just like that. And you can come back to a basic frame as well. And let's come back to circle. You need to understand that when you create the image frame, it will be a rectangle. But after you can change for any shapes, you can convert any type of image to any type of shapes. Now if I just go on right here, you can also adjust sharp point. When you double click on the double click on the frame as you can see when you're inside, but you can also click on the frame. You can also go on the shape value and you can click on Edit. And if you click on Edit, you can also even adjust your frame at your convenience like this. It's even possible to do this type of work as you can see. If I just validate, I will double click and maybe I can drag in moving my element inside, or I can go back to the image properties. I can scale a little bit more and I will take, for example, this one. Concretely, you can put image inside any type of element, any type of element. You can select any type of shapes, you can put image inside. If I'm just going to remove this one, I will create this circle. Don't forget that you can also add a stroke and for this in the property panels, you can also define lines. And when you define lines, you can enter value. For example, you can create frames with a line value like this. I can define ten. I will go in the colors value. So here we have colors. And in colors, I will define stroke, and in stroke I will define, for example, the red color. You can create stroke around, and to create a stroke around, you just need to click on Stroke. If you click on feel, you can put anything, but because you have an image, it's not going to change anything, but you can put stroke, and then you go on the right in the shape pictures. You can just define the size of your stroke just like this. It is also something important to know. You can create a decoration or adjustment on around, it depends on your shape is going to be exactly the same thing and you will obtain this render. If I want to remove, I can come back to airlines and I have also the possibility to come back to strap colors, and I will activate none. Thanks to that, I can only have this render. This is how to work with images. After I'm going to show you another example and also more properties. 31. Add images part 2: We're going to continue with the images. So we have seen how to create images, how to integrate images, and we're going to make a concrete example. First, I will go on the top left corners and we will define the document setup. And in the document setup we will work with here on this area, we can change the margins and bleeds. So on this area, I have the possibility to change the margins. And for this, we have the left and right. So first, I will define the margins, I will put ten, I will activate the proportions and I will validate. Forgot to do something when you go on file and you select the document setup. You need to apply margin and bleed and apply the change just like that. After to do this work, I will separate my page and I will go on page here, manage guide, and we will work in columns and rows and we will define a number of horizontal element like sui and in vertical just one. We will use a gap, and in the gap feature we apply a space like 10 millimeters and here also 10 millimeters. Thanks to that, I can crad my structure. I will click on Apply and I will get out. I will select here the rectangle image rectangle frame tools. And we'll go on this area. I can use a page Snap to guide as well, and thanks to that, we can perfectly snap on each corner of this area just like that. So after to do this type of work, something that I would like to do it is to integrate the image inside. I will go right click, I will seg image. I have four images with temple Temple one, two, three, and four, and I will select the Temple one, and the image will appear inside. So now what we will do, as I explained to Agers the best way is to use image properties, and you use two frame size first and after free scaling, you can increase little bits of size, and when you are satisfied, you can double click and you can dragging and moving to take the part of the image that you want. Then I will select the frame and I will press Control D to duplicate, and I will duplicate here. The problem is, as you can see the size is not good here. Why it's not good because I forgot to do something. When we go in page manage guide, we need to apply column and rows with refer to to margin. And now it's going to be pretty better. And thanks to that, I can scale this one here and I can scale this one yes on this area and we will have the same size. So now I will replace the image inside. I will go right click here. I will select Get image, and I will select the temple number two. We will go on the right one more time, to frame size, prescing. We will increase it will be the size and double click we just take only a part of the image. So let's repeat the process. I will select this image, this frame text, this frame image, and I will go right click, I will duplicate as well or if you prefer edit item duplicate or Control D, and I will duplicate again. Then I will go right click Yet Image, temple suit, and I will go on the right to frame size. Freescaling, will increase little bit of size and we can just adjust double click to adjust the image inside the frame. And I will duplicate again. I will press Control D, I will duplicate, play this one here, and right click Get image temples number four, and I will one more time use two frame size. Prescale. We can increase it a bit the size and double click to adjust what I want exactly inside. And that's it. So this is the way to process. As you can see, it's pretty convenient. I'm saying I'm going to do it is to come back on page here. And when I go on page, I will just use manage guide, and I will remove all this element. I will come back to zero, zero, and I will apply to lepage and at the same time, I will go on file. I will define document system. So thanks to that, we can see how to work with this different element. And in margins and lead, I will just remove to the left with a value of zero and apply just like that. As you can see, you can create structure using this way. The last thing that I wanted to show you for the image, I will select all the image and press delete. I will define one more time another image here. As you can see, I created a rectangle. I can go right click. I can just convert to image frame. Now I can feel. I can go right click Get Image. We will select another one and what I will select, I have image with road, so I will define this one and I will go on the right and I will define two frame size just like that. And free scaling after we increase little bit the size here, and we will zoom little bit on this image. What I wanted to show you also is you can have filters. When filters, you click on the image and you can see image effect and you can open these panels. When you go right click, you have also image effect or Control A, and when you just click Control E, when you just click here, you can find available effect, available effect. Have multiple way to apply the effect. If you want to add blue, you double click, you can enter value of blue, for example, six, you can see the preview on this area and I can validate and I can add blue, as you can see. If you come back on image effect, you can see the blue appear here. You can click on the blue and you can remove if you want to delete. But you can also improve image with multiple effects at the same time. For example, I can use contrast and I will increase the contrast, I will click on ab and I will improve little bits or contrast of my image. I will use brightness. I will click on brightness and I will increase little bit brightness as well on my image. Then I would like to increase with the curves, and with the curve this is another way to work with a contrast. We can put different points. I'm not going to enter in detail with image editing because this software focus not on this, but just to show you. So you can use the curves. And if I want, for example, to improve improve the quality of details, you can use Sharpen and it is a great way. You can activate Sharpen. You can define a radius and you can reinforce the level of details with sharpens. If I'm satisfied, I have four adjustment. I will just validate and we just need to wait a little bit and that's it. Sometimes you can zoom in zoom out and you can really see the difference on this image before, after. But it is interesting. Right click Image effect or when you go in when you click on the frame, image property, you can see image effect as well. When you go here, you can have multiple ema. You can change the position of the element for simple reason that in some case, sometimes the position of the element will differ about the impact of the effect, foreground background. This is why we have the arrow here. Can remove only one element. If I want to remove brightness, I can remove brightness and keep this. But if I want to remove all, I just need to click on remove all just like this and we can recuperate the original image. So don't forget that you have the possibility to use this image effect and it's pretty convenient if you want to improve the image. So it's okay for that. We're going to click here, remove the image, and it's okay about how to add 32. Add guides: We're going to see how to create guides. And for this some things that we can do if you want to create guides. First, you need to go on Windows, and when you go here on view, you can select grids and guides and you can find show guide. So this is the first things to do. If you want to see the guide, you need to display show guides. So after that, as you can see, you have also the possibility when you go on the different options, you have different type of option here. And in the document, you can also apply the margin if you need. So after that, you can find a horizontal ruler here and you can find a vertical ruler here. And what we can do, we can concretely pull a guide and place a guide on this area. This, you can just go left click and you can pull a guide on the area. Here I have a horizontal guide, I can draw another one and you can pull a guide. You are not going to have exactly a perfect position for a simple reason that you need to zoom and you need to take a look about the position in millimeters. After to understand that, if I want to create a vertical guide, I can just draw a guide on this area. If you want to remove a guide, I'm going to show you after how to remove. But first, when you do something like this, for example, I create in frame like, for example, I create rectangles and I can draw a rectangle here. As you can see, I can dragging and moving my rectangles. And I can place my rectangle, I can snap depending on the snapping option. This when you go on page, you can snap two guides and snap to tap, for example. So here I'm going to apply Snap two guides. When you use Snap to guide, you can snap to the border of the page and at the same time to the guide. For example, I can snap here, and as you can see, you will feel that you can snap with a guide. Let's crat another rectangle. I will crat another one. I will draw a rectangle here. I will go into color panels on the right, and I will define the blue colors. After to define the blue color, I can place this rectangle here, I can snap and I can extend the rectangle and snap to this guide as well. I can create another rectangles, default shape rectangles, and I can create another one here, define another colors, and after that, I will do something like this. And I will create another one, default rectangles. Maybe I can draw rectangle here. I will define the green color. I will snap on this area and snap on this area. So this is the first things to understand. I'm going to select all the rectangle and delete this rectangle. To delete a guide, you have two options. The first option is to dragging and moving the guide outside on the ruler and you can remove a guide as you can see. The second option is if you have guide like this, I'm going to draw two other guides. You can go on the top here and when you go on page, you can find manage guide. Here you can find single colon rose Misc. When you click on Single, you can find the guide that I place on this area and you can delete the guide from this area, or you can go here, delete guide from all the pages or just the current page. Here I only have one page so I can click on this one or this one. It's going to work properly. So now what I'm going to do, I'm going to show you the second way to create a guide. The second way is to go on page, manage guide, and you can go on single. From this, you can add a guide. I can click on Add and can place with more precision guide. For example, in horizontal way, I can place one at 20 and you just need to click on AD. If I want another one at 200, I can type 200 and I can place another one. If I want a vertical guide just on this area, I can add another one. I will add maybe one at tens. And I will add anoerO maybe a second one at 40. But you can see you can add guide just like this. And depending if you just adjust, sometime you can change the color just like that and you can put, for example, anoer guide and adjust with different colors. You have the possibility to log a guide. If you log a guide, you just apply the guide, you just move here. As you can see, I cannot move any guide because I log the guide. So when you go on page here, you select manage guide, you have the possibility to log the guide just like this. I'm going to click on this one and delete. Now if I don't log the guide, I have the possibility to move the guide again. I will go on page, I will select one of time manage guide, and as you can see, I move this guide. If I want to recuperate position specific position, I will take, for example, 60, and I will just click on AplaTPages. This is how we can add guides. And after as I explained, you can select any tools, like, for example, rectangle and you can just snap to the guide. It's pretty convenient for the simple reason that you can use the guide and you can apply snap to guide. I will select rectangles. I will click here. I will define colors, and then I will snap to this position, and I will snap to this position, and I will snap to this position as well. I could continue I have multiple area as you can see. We click on this rectangle press dit. Click on this rectangle press Digit as well. Now if I want to delete all the guide, as I explained, you can come back on page, you can select manage guide, and here you can delete only one guide. To delete only one guide, you click on the guide and you can click on Dt. You click on the guide and you can click on Di it. Second way to go on Misc here and you can delete guide only from the current page. Here we have only one page if you apply the guide on all pages, you can also delete the guides from all the pages. So these pages are all the pages depending on your number of pages. Here, I'm going to show you on your one page, but you can adjust at your convenience. Oh, here we can delete the guide from all pages if we need. But this is a two way to process. The first process is to work on this area here. And with the rulers and the second process is to go on page and to select manage guide. And here, you can enter specific values, sometimes convenient because you can have more precision. And you can also delete all guide in a very fast way instead to just dragging and moving the guide on the ruler to delete. So this is how we can process. 33. Add columns: We're going to see how to work with colons. So for this to work with columns, we have the possibility to go on page here. And when we go on page, you can just use managed Guide. When you use managed guide, you have the possibility in your page to separate in columns and rows. And here you can find horizontal and vertical. For example, I can just click here and in horizontal, I can display different separations. I can also do this vertically. For example, I will separate in two horizontal rows and in the vertical way, I will separate in columns and I will apply, for example, swi. Here, the reference is the page, but you can use also a margin reference. How to process, you need first to add a margin. You can go on the left, you go on file, document set up in the document setup. You can go in here. You have the possibility to go on margin and blend and you can define margins. I will define, for example, margins at 10 millimeters, I will tap ten, I will activate here the proportions, and I will use applied change to all pages and I will validate. Now the margin is displayed. I can put the guide from the margins and put the columns from the margin. For this, you can go on page you can select manage guide, and you will replace this one by margins and this one by margins. So thanks to that, we can place this one by margin. You can also use the gap. The gap, what is this? It is the the value that you can use between each columns and each can apply use a gap, for example, I will apply maybe ten millimeter as well. I will click on ten millimeter and ten millimeter here and you can see the space between we have two more guide to define the space between each area. And why it can be useful because you can create a structure. I can separate maybe with three horizontal columns, and I will just apply. You can apply to one page or to all page when you click here. If I just zoom out, I have the possibility to, for example, I will create frame image, and I will create a structure. I will use page, I will apply Snap to guides here. And thanks to that, I can snap to my guides just like this. And I will go right click here. I will define gettimage. And after to define get Image, I will use, for example, this image with Rod and I will go on the right image properties to frame size, pre scaling, and I will increase little bit to size and double click to scale the image. Now what I will do I will press Control D to duplicate. Oops. It's not going to work properly, I will click on the frame Control D, and I will duplicate and Control D, and I will duplicate again. Then I will select all this image and Control D again, and I will dragging and moving here. Then Control D again. You just need to snap to the guide and Control D again, and I will snap to the guide. As you can see, you can create a complete structure. I will go on this area and I will deactivate with the preview mode and you can create complete structure. Just like this. I I zoom little in, you can create a complete structure with the right disposition between the different areas. I will click here and after to click here, I will select the different frames, and I will press delete on the keyboard to come back to this area. After to do this type of work, something that we will go, will go on the top here, and I will go on manage guide. And if you want to remove all the guide, you can come back to zero, but something that you can do just to click on the right here and you can delete all the guide just like that. Now what I'm going to do, I'm going to show you another example. If you want to add text, separate in different column, it's also the way to process. Even if inside the text frame, you can also separate in the text properties in different columns, you can also do this for the structure of the page. For this, you will go on page, you will select manage guide, and on this area, I will come back here. We define horizontally once and I will use a gap as well. For this, we can use a value. I will use maybe ten millimeter, one more times and I will separate vertical and vertically, I will apply to. I will use a gap and I will define a value and I will apply a value as well of ten. Now we have separate, as you can see, we have one area, two, three, four, five, six. I will apply to all page, it means if you have multiple pages, you will be able to apply this on multiple pages. Here we're going to stay on one page, but you understand the principle of work. I will click here and I will select the frame text. We'll click on the frame text tools. We will go right click here and we can with the right click inside the text, apply a simple text. After to apply a simple text, I will select the language, I will validate just like this and I can click on my frame text, I can put this on the top left corner on my margins and then I can extend until my guides. After to do this type of work, I will go on the right and I will click here linked text justify. Now what I will do, I will duplicate. I will press Control D, and I will duplicate my text here, and then I will press Control D again and I will duplicate my text here. I will press Control D again and I will duplicate my text here. I will press Control D again, I will place my text here, and then Control D again, and I will place my text just here. So as you can see, we can place multiple elements of text just like this. And it's definitely very convenient because you can create a structure of page. We have the same space between each area, and this is why it is convenient. Again, click here to activate the preview, and you can see we have the right structure just like this. So now what I'm going to do, I will come back here. I will select all the element and press delete. As explained if you want to remove the guide, you go on page, you select manage guide. And in manage guide, what you will be able to do, you will be able to change the number and I will apply here, you can apply zero. But if you are not at zero, you just go here and you can delete the guide from the current page or all the pages like this to come back to zero. It is the same. If I want to remove the margin, I will go on file. I will select the document setups, and I will select margin end bleeds and inside margin bleeds, you can apply zero and apply proportionally to all the elements. General layout margin bleeds, and here we can apply zero. I will apply the change to all the pages or all the master pages, I will validate and we can come back to this original image. 34. Add grid: We're going to see how to work with grid. And for this, something that we can do to work with grid. The first thing to do is to go on view here. And when you veto and view, you can find grids and guides, and you can de after two click on Show grid, as you can see, you are not going to display anything for a simple reason that you need to have a lever of Zoom. So if you are this lever on Zoom, as you can see, you are not going to see anything. If you zoom in, as you can see, the grid will be now display. And you can just enter a specific percentage, and as you can see at 40%, for example, you can display the grid, but at 25%, it's not going to work. Now how you can edit the grid? Because you have division and subdivision. You can go on the top left corners and you can go in the document setup. First, you can also go into preferences and the preferences to set the grid for all the documents that you craft. After that, you can go into document setup, and in the document setup, we can define here. We have layout marginal bleed. And saving here. And if you just go below, you can find guides, Plasman visibility colors. If I go on Plasman here, you can find the measure grid spacing. So by default, we have a grid spacing depending on the page that you have. And if you want to adjust, if, for example, I want to have a measure grid every 20 millimeter, I can do every 20. And if I apply a minor grid four, for example, I will have five small square between the measure grid. And I'm going to show you because 20/4, we can obtain five. If I just validate here, I will zoom on this area and you can find the major grid here 20 millimeter by 20 millimeter and the minor grid inside with five subdivision. So now what we can do, we can also on the file options here, and on the file options, I will go in the document setups. In the document setups, just on this area, I will have the possibility to go on guides and you can change again. If for example, you want to have only two subdivision, you can just switch for maybe 10 millimeters, and I will have 20 10 millimeters, so divided by two, if I just validate. As you can see now we only have two subdivision for the measure grid. Now if you take a look, you will go on the page here and you can apply snap to grid. So here you can snap to the guide, snap to items, and you can find Snap to Grid. If you don't apply snap to grid, you create something like, for example, rectangles and I create something here. As you can see, I'm not going to snap and it's not going to work proper. Now, what I can do, I will go on this area default shapes. I will go on this area page, snap to grid, and I can snap not only to this area, I can also snap to the grid. And we can extend on this direction until maybe this one. So now what we're going to do, we're going to reduce, for example, two letter space on the top and to letter space on the right also. And for this, I will let two small square on the left and two small square on the right. We'll adjust the color. I will go on the right here and I will adjust the colors. In the color features, I will use the black colors. I will use, for example, I will use this one. And I will select the text tools. With a text tool, I will snap to this area. I will create a frame text and double click here, I will go right click here, and I will apply a simple text. Well apply a single text, I will define the language, and I will just validate like this. I will select all the texts or I don't need to select. You can just select the frame text. You can go in the text properties here, and I will justify like this. As you can see, you can create structure, for example, you can snap to the grid. I can, for example, create frame text like this, and I can select this rectangle and can press Control D to duplicate and place here. Then I can press Control D to maybe duplicate the text, for example, and I can place Control D, duplicate the text again. And as you can see, you can define some the same space if you need. I can press Control D with this one, place this element on this area, and I can adjust just like that. So you can create a page structure using this one. If I just come back here on the file options, if I just go back on the document setups, when you sell guide here you can find the snap distance. So generally, you can keep the value by default, but you can find the snap distance and the grab reduce as well. Here, this is a visibility. So you can use a page grid with the type because you can use crosses and dots. In this case, if I zoom, you can see dotted. I'm going to remove all the content and show you if you zoom here, you can find dotted. So it's a little bit different as you can see. And I will define, yes. It's a bit different. You can go on file. You can select the document setups, define guides, and visibility, I can come back to lines, for example. Also baseline grid. I'm going to choose baseline grid in a different way because it's different, it's totally different. And I will explain how you can work with a baseline grid. In this case, we're just going to focus on the page grid. You can click on colors, and here you have the colors of the different information, margins, major grid, minor grid. Baseline grid, and you can adjust the color. You can just click here and if you want to change, if you want to satisfy, you can just click here and you can adjust the color. Here we are in green, but if you prefer different color, you can adjust with a different colors. The last point is now if you want to deactivate, for example, the snapping option, you can go on page and you can deactivate, for example, Snap to Grid, but I can deactivate the older one if I need as well. If you want to deactivate the preview of the grid, you can just go on view. You can see the grid and guide and you can deactivate Show, for example, grid. And in this case, if I zoom in, as you can see, I'm not going to see the grid anymore. This is how we can work with the grid. 35. Add base grid: We're going to see how to work with the baseline grid. For this, we're going to see how to work with this and why it is extremely interesting. The first thing is to understand to activate the baseline grid, you can go on the top here, and when you select a view, you have text frame and you can activate Show baseline grid. I will click here and the baseline grid will be display. The baseline grid, what is this? It is to adjust your text on the baseline grid. I'm going to show you after why it can be extremely useful. First, let's see how to edit this baseline grid. Concretely, you can go on file here. You can select the document setup, and in the guides option here you have placement, visibility and colors. You can also switch the baseline grid from these panels as well. You can activate or deactivate the baseline grid for this panel. Here, this is the color of the baseline grid. And if you want to change the color, you can change the colors and this one is just the placement. Here we have the document setup, layout margin bleeds and saving here, I will define a margin on this area. And I will define, by the way, a margin at maybe 12 millimeters. I will activate here, and I will just the date. Just to take a look when you come back here, you have the guide. And you have the baseline grid spacing here. This is where you can change the size of your baseline. If for example, I apply something like 26, so I will tap 26. I will validate and you can see the space between each element at 26. Why it is useful, it is useful because when you create a frame text, for example, I'm going to add a frame text. Oops, I forgot to I will double click first, I will go right click and I will apply a simple text, and we will apply a simple text just like this. Something that I will do first, I will come back to five because I forgot to do something in the guide here. So we have placed the baseline grid with 26. With the document set up, we'll apply margin to all the pages just like that. So now I will select my text, and my text I will place here, I will place on the right, and I will extend until the end of my page. Something that you can do. As you can see, you can adjust your text on the baseline grid, and how you can do this. You can just and with the text property. When you go on the text properties, first, I will justify here, and you have a fixed line spacing by default. This one is just a space between the different lines, and you can switch or allying to baseline grid. And in this case, as you can see, all the text will be perfectly allied to my baseline grid, and it will correspond to a specific value. So now if I change, I will go on file. I will select the document setup, and in the document set up in the guide options, I will decrease the baseline grid for, for example, 20, as you can see the text will be adjusted. This is the first interest. Now I will go on view. I will select text frame, deactivate this and remove the text. I'm going to show you another very interesting example. And for this, the first thing that we're going to do is to work with this page, and we will separate in page, we apply manage guide, and in manage guide, we will separate in two here. And we'll apply gaps. We will apply gaps with just maybe six, and I will apply to page. Now what I will do, I will select the text tools. And with the text tools, I will create a frame text we snap here and we snap here and double click and right click to apply a simple text. I will apply one more time a simple text, maybe ten paragraph, I will validate, and I will go on the text properties option in the text property option will justify the text here. So I will save my text frame, text property, and justify. So now I will duplicate with Control D, and I will place another one here. I forgot to do something in the page option, manage guide, I need to apply the guide from the margin. It's going to be pretty better. And now I can dragging and moving this one. Oops, I need to adjust. So this one I will adjust just here, we remove this one, and now I can press Control D, and I can play this one with the same size and Control D again. So now what we will do we move like this. This one will move like this and this one will move maybe like this. I will add image, so I will select the image frame tools. We'll create the image just like that on this area and right click, I will insert image, get image, and I will insert image with maybe the row just like this. Applicable on the right image properties, and in the image property will use two frame size rescaling I will increase little bit the size and double click to play the image just like that. I will duplicate this image. I will click here I will press Control D, and I will duplicate on this area, and I will change the size a little bit, and I will press Control D, I will place another one just like this, and I will change the size again. So now we'll adjust the text on this area and we will adjust the text on this area. As you can see, the size of the image of the frame image are different. What does it mean? It means that here in this area, because prime image are different size, the text are not going to correspond here. This line is not in front of this one and this one is not in front of this one, the alignment is not properly, and this is why we can use the baseline grid. How to process concretely, you can first activate the baseline grid so we will go on view text frame and show baseline grid. After that you define the value of your baseline grid. So you can go on edit here. You can go on file here, you can go on the document setups. And in the guide property, you can define the baseline grid spacing. Let's apply, for example, 20. You can also apply offset from the top. If you apply offset for six, you will have a small offset on the top here six point. Is the type of things that you can do. So in the document setting, when you go in the guide here, you can also activate a baseline grid offset. So if I define, for example, baseline grid spacing with 20 point. What I need to do I just need to if I want to be in the right alignment, so it means the text here and the text here in front. I need to select each element of text, go on the right, and here to replace the fixed line spacing by align to base grid. And I can align here. I can select, for example, this one, and I can use Ally and I can click on this one, and I can use line to baseline grid. Now if I zone, as you can see, this text here is perfectly in front of this one. The text on the left is perfectly in front of the right, thanks to the baseline grid, thanks to this adjustment. You can have different sides of the Image. It's not a problem. The text will be perfectly haline on each columns, thanks to the baseline grid. And this is why it can be extremely useful. You can come back on file, you can come back into document setups. And if you want to change the baseline grid space, you can just come back here, you select for example guide, and I'm going to reduce. Maybe I'm going to put 18 print. And if I just validate, now I reduce to 18 print. And as you can see, the text is still just perfectly in front because we halin each front text on the baseline grid. So this is why link to baseline grid can be extremely useful. I can activate the preview and you can see we have perfectly the text perfectly in front of each columns, even if we have different image frame size. So what we will do we come back here, I will remove all the elements. So first, I will go on view here, and I will deactivate show baseline grid. Then I will go on page. I will use Manage guide, and in manage guide, I will click here and delete the different guides, and then we can see this one again. I will go into document setups, and I will select yes margin and bleeds. We will put a value of zero here, we activate this one and I will just validate. I forgot something it is in the document setup. Don't forget to apply the change to the pages. Oops, right? Document setups. Yes, margin and bleeds, applies to change just like this and validate. Yes, now it's okay. 36. Add text part 1: We're going to see how to add text. And for this something that we can do to add text, we can see the text tool here. And with the text tool, you can create a text frame, and after to create this text frame, you will be able to enter your text. First I will click on these tools. As you can see, we have the content property here, and the content property will be switched directly to the extent text properties. I will create a rectangle just like that, if you want to tape your text, double click and automatically, you will be redirected to the edit content frame and you can tape your text. For example, I'm going to tape title content. After that, if you want to adjust, you click here. And the first things to understand if you take a look on the properties, just the general properties. It will move your text frame just like this and the position and Y just like that. And if you click on the colors features here, the color will apply not on the text, but on the text frame. For example, if I click here, I can apply a color on my text frame. So at this moment, I'm going to apply no. After that, to adjust the text, you can click on the text properties. And on text properties, you can define different options. First, you can change the font family. You have different type of font families that you can use here, like, for example, this one, and you can change you have multiple types of font family. I'm going to come back with a basic font family, this one, and you can change if you want in bolt and you have multiple options that you can use on this area. After that, you can change the size. Here, this is the size of the text. So in print, you can change the value as you can see. You like something bigger, you will obtain something like this because it's not going to fit inside the frame. You can adjust here the position inside your frame. For example, if I want to center, we click on center, and you have fixed line space, it is a space between your different line. Here you have only one element. To adjust your element automatically vertically as well, you can click on columns and distance, and you have the vertical alignment and you can change for bottom and for Midl. If you click on Midol here and Midl here, you can put your frame like that. Now if for example, I apply on the page, I will apply Snap two guide, and I will apply Snap two items, and I will play this one here, and I will extend on these directions. And after to do this work, if I want to apply, for example, on my text frame colors, what I will do, I will go back to the properties and to the color properties, I will switch or for example, I will apply something like this blue color. Or I can put red color as well. And if I adjust my text, if I adjust my frame, the text will be adjusted inside. If you want to adjust the color of the text. So to adjust the color on the text, you need to go in the text properties. And in the text properties here, you have the possibility to change the color in color and effect. So here you have color and effect, and you can just change the color. If I want blue, I will define blue. If I want white, I will define white. This one is a little bit different. It is for to surround your text with color. For example, you can put magenta like this or you can put green like this and you can do something like this. So really understand the color between the text between the area around the text and then the text frame. You have three type of possibility, as you can see. Now, if I just continue, I can find more options. So if I make a summary, if I make a summary, I will click on the text tools here, and you can just crap frame just like that. I will put the frame here, just like that, and I will tap something again. I will double click and I will tape directly plain, title, content and more option. Let tap anythings like this. I will select my text one more time. I don't need to see that I can just select the frame. I can go in center as well. I will select color and text exitance, and I will define the vertical alignment, you can go bottom and you can go Mer. Then I will go on this area with increase a little bit the size of the text. Here, I will go on this frame and I will increase the size. I will put something like 60. And as you can see, you can put your text like this. If I select this frame. So after we have more options that I will explain more in detail when really crap paragraph. But at this moment, if you want to edit the text, you double click, or you click on these tools, Edit content of frame and it is same, you can edit the content. So when you click on the tools, it is like to double click on your text frame. Now if I go on this area, something that I will do, it is to if I click on this text frame, you have also the possibility to edit the text with the story editor. When you click here, you can open this panel. I'm going to show you again, you click here and you can open these panels. In this panel, you can also edit the text in a different way. If you want extend the panels just like this, you can select what you want and Walmart, you can change the font family here. You can change also the size. You can work with the spacing between, for example, the letters or the spacing horizontally, but the problem is, you don't have too much the previous here. You have information about the number of words, the total of paragraph, and character as well, and you have more options here. You want to underline the text and more options. You are satisfied, you can go on file here, and when you go on file, you can just update text frame and exit, so you can update the text frame and exit. And after that, I will be able to validate my change. So every time you want to make some modification, you can go on this area. But you have also the possibility to go on these options and you can also edit the text. You can select what you want, you can adjust. I'm going to reduce again to 20 point, and this one maybe 100, and I will just click on file here, or you can also click on this area, exit without updated text frame, and this one load text four frame. Or you can click here, update text frame and exit, just like this. This is how you can add text first, and as you can see, if I adjust, because I selected MDL horizontally and vertically, it's going to be adjusted as well. It is important to understand that. 37. Add text part 2: We're going to continue with the text. For this, something that we're going to do, it is to zoom little bit, and I will go on file first and I will select the document setter. In the document setups, we switch or yes, margin and bleed, and we will apply a small margin with ten millimeter proportion, and I will apply the change and validate. Now I will show you how to craft paragraph. For this, I will select one more time, the text frame tools, and I will snap around here until this corner point, just like that. I will adjust maybe little bit just like that. Who edit the content, I can click on these tools or double click and it's going to work. Now you can tap the text that you want. You can also go right click. And when you go right click, you can click on Get Text and you can insert and copy the text that you have in a specific area on your computer. And in this area, you have sample text. I'm going to use sample text to import just affect text. I will click here to have example text, I will select the language. And you can define a number of paragraph you have random and happen to existing text by default, will keep these parameters, and I will just validate. And as you can see, multiple content with paragraph has been created here. Now if I select this one, one more time, take a look, you can click on this area and you can also edit from here. So if you want to edit from here, as you can see, it's possible. You can find the separation between the different paragraph, you can find the information about the word, the character, number, total of paragraph on this area. And one more time, you can make adjustment if you need. I'm going to get out on this one and take a look on the right. So one more time, I can work with the properties. So for example, colors, just like this. But I can also work with a frame color just like this, as you can see the color with a pa apply only around the characters, not everywhere, just like that. I'm going to come back with the black colors. After that, something important to know, you can find the fixed line spacing, so you see the space between the line and we can address the space between the line on this area. You can also reduce if you need. If I continue here, first line of set. If we move, you can see the first line and you have maximum ascent to pass perfectly on the top front ascent, line spacing, and baseline grid, just like that. By default, we use front ascent. Interesting you have here often window is a little bit specific. You have the paragraph effic. The paragraph eff you can put different type of effect at the beginning. Like for example, you have a drop caps, you have a bullet with a point in front of each paragraph. And so you see some paragraph fi that you can apply. You can also have a list with a number just in front of each element. Don't forget that you can justify your text. If I zum out I can justify like this one or this one. In this case, I will justify using this one just like this. Something that we can do also is to have access to the colon and text and distance. We can separate in multiple columns using the page options in manage guide. And when you go page manage guide, you can separate in columns. But you can inside a text frame like this, you can separate in column and text distance with, for example, a number of columns. I can separate like this. For example, I can separate the two and define a gap, and I can define a gap just like this. It means a space between my element. I can also define by wide of the columns if you prefer. But I think it's more convenient to use the gap. And in the gap, I will use value, I will decrease to a value of 10 millimeters. You can even add a space on the top. It means on the top, you can add a space. On the bottom, you can add a space also if you need, as you can see, I can put ten here, I can put some space also on the left or some space on the right, as you can see inside your frame text. In this case, I will come back to zero, and I will come back to zero here, and I will come back to zero to the top also. This is a type of thing that we can do also for the column, text and distance. You can put some optical margins to make some adjustment. I'm going to keep none. You can have some advance. Advancing is also interesting. You have also fun features, past text properties, but this is a little bit more advanced for this one. Something that I wanted to show you, it is advanced settings. And if I zoom a little bit in the advanced settings, what you can find, you can find on this area, offset to baseline of character. So here you can crack offset to the base of your character in the midle in percentage, depending on the baseline grid. I will explain how to use the baseline grid in a different way. On this area, you can find the space, and this one is a space between the litters. So you can change the space between the litters. So this one is a space between the letters. You can also change the size of the letters horizontally, so increase the size of the letters horizontally, and you can increase the size of the letter vertically, so it means on this area as well. Here, change the size of the letter horizontally and vertically. You can also put a negative value if you need. I will come back to zero, and here I will come back to zero also, and that's it here we have the font features as well. One more time, if I wanted to see the different options that we have. If one more time I want to change the frame, I can go into properties, general properties, and in the general properties, I can see the colors. And if I want to apply some colors to all my frame, I can apply the colors on all my frame as you can see, just like this. As you can see, it's pretty convenient. You need to understand you have this text frame to start after double click or you click here to edit the content, and you can also have access to editor text on this area. Don't forget that you need to have the text property. It's extremely important, and this is the reason for which in Windows, you need to activate content properties. When you activate content properties, it will allow you to have access to the image properties and the text properties. I will switch to text or image property depending on what you choose. Just on this area. So I can go on file, I can select the document setup. I will come back on margins, and we will apply a value of zero proportions, and I will validate like this. 38. Wrap text part 1: We're going to see how to work with wrap text for this, something that we are going to do first, it is to add a margin. I will go on the left here, I will go into document setup, and in the document setup we define margins here. In the margins, I will define a value. I will apply a margin with 10 millimeters just like this, and I will activate the proportions. Then we can apply to all pages. After to do this type of work, I will create a complete frame text. I will create a text frame. We will be able to go on page and snap to guide, and thanks to that, I can create a frame just to the value of the margins, and we can just double click and right click to apply a simple text. And after to apply a simple text, I will define number of paragraph like 12 paragraph just like this. Now we will select all the text, and after to select all the text, I will go into text properties. We will justify the text, and I can adjust maybe with 40. So let's see how to work with text. Ap text, what is this? It is when you have a shape or you have a image frame, you can wrap the text around. Let's take an example, I will go on this area and I will add text image frame. I will go left click here. I will go right click to get image, and I will select the image with a road for example, and I will go on the right image properties to frame size, free scaling, and I will increase a little bit size, double click to address the image inside, and I will click on the frame again and I will scale little bit. I will at the same time create another image as well. You can use a default shape, you will use a circle will integrate after inside. But first, I'm going to show you that you can apply this on the shape. So first, when I select this image frame. As you can see, the text is just on the back. So now, how you can put the text around. You select the image first and the frame image, you go on the right and you can go in the properties. The properties, you need to go in the shape properties. And in the shape properties, what you can see, you can find this one. This is a text flow. Text flow around the frame disable. You can apply text flow around frame shape. And in this case, as you can see the text will be around the shapes. And if I move, as you can see, my text is going to move as well. When you click here, you can put the text around the booding box. When you have a rectangle, it's not going to change anything. And here, text flow around the control line. This one will be useful when you want to add more space between your frame. So concretely, if I move my frame here on the left, I scale, for example, a little bit my frame. As you can see, when you go on this area, you don't have space on this area, and it's not pretty good. So how you can process to adjust this one, you can click on just here on text flow around the frame shape first after you go on Edit. And in edit, what you can do, you can apply Edit Control line. And when you click on Edit Control line, you have the possibility to apply and to enlarge with a value. Like, for example, 10%, but it can be more. You can just define the specific value here and you can enlarge. After to enlarge with the value, as you can see the outline is here, but you cannot directly apply this one. So you just need to validate. After to validate, switch directly here or text flow around control line, and it's going to work like this. But the thing that you need to understand, don't click here first and after go to edit because it's not going to work properly. It's little trend, but it's not going to work properly. So don't click here and after edit. First go on text flow around frame shapes, edit, and then switch after to this one. As you can see, the text will be around just like that around the hotlines. And this is why we have this type of space. You can also switch, and as you can see, it can be pretty convenient. And after if you want to adjust, we'll just click on this area. You can select the text frame again, and depending on how you are going to move your image frame, the text will follow, as you can see. Here it is same. When you have something like this, it works with a shape or any image frame. So if you click here, it's going to work as well. In this case, let's import image inside. I will go right click, I will convert to image frame, and I will go right click again and I will get image. And what image I will get, I will get image with models and I will put the image inside image properties. After to do this type of work, I will use two frame size pre scaling, and we will increase little bit the size. Double click to play the image inside just like that. Now what we will do I will click on the image frame. I will click outside, click on the image frame, and I will adjust little bit the size of my image. Just like that. Yes. So now I will go on the right, and in the properties, I will go in the shape properties. And in the shape property, I can put the text around just like that. As you can see the text will be around. So if I move, the text will stay around the ellipse. And if you click here, text flow around the bonding box. Even if you have ellipse, you can put the text like you had rectangles, just like this, like you had a bounding box. Even if you have something like ellipse or any type of shapes. So this is why we have this option. And here, text flow around the contour line. And if you want to adjust the text, it means to have more space, I'm going to scale a little bit, just like that. So if you want to have more space around, how you can do first you click here. Explore around the frame shapes. After to click here, you go on Edit. And after to go on Edit, you can use Edit control line. Here you can define space. Maybe I would like 10 millimeters, I will apply ten and I will click and I will extend like this. But if you wanted, for example, in percentage, you can do this. If for example is too much, I will just go back here and I will reduce a little bit, maybe six, and I will extend a little bit here with six. And I will just validate. And after to apply the value of the control line, you just need to click here and activate Text around Control line. And now you can find this space around. So as you can see, it's convenient. And if I just dragging and moving, you can do this type of work. And as you can see, the text will follow just like that. And you can extend, for example, the size of your element, the text will continue with the space that we define. You just need to be careful because if I scale here, the image is not going to be properly inside. So we'll go into image property again. I will scale again, and I will double click to adjust the position of the image inside. Here it is sem, I can just click on the framed here. So I can click on the image frame, left click here. As you can see if I move the text will be on round and I can move on the right. You can find with outlines here that we can define some space. I can just click on this area, as you can see, it's convenient. You just need to be careful about the position you need also for your text to justify because if you don't justify the text, generally, it's not going to be pretty convenient. Generally, you need to justify the text. It's more interesting. Oh, we are going to click on A, press delete. I will come back to the document setup just like this, and we will come back to zero. And after I will show you with a concrete example why it can be useful as well. 39. Wrap text part 2: We're going to continue with the wrap text. And for this something that we're going to do it is to create different element first. So we'll create different elements on this page. First, I will go on the top left corner, I will go in the document setups. And in the document setups, we can apply here. We have different options and we'll use margin and bleeds, and I will apply a margin with ten millimeter, activate the proportion, and apply the change to the pages. After that, I will separate in columns. We have seen that we can separate in columns in page, manage guides, and here I will define columns and rows. And in columns and rows, we will separate in hoops, not this number in a vertical way, we separate in two. And I will use a gap as well, and I will define a gap of 10 millimeters. Apply to all pages, you need to apply from the margin. It's going to be pretty better for what I want to do. Apply to all pages. So after to do this type of work, I will select the text frame tools. We create a frame text, need to check a in the page you activated Snap to guide, and you can create a frame text, and you can snap the frame around this area. Then double click to enter inside the text, right click and apply a simple text as an example, we select the language. I will define maybe eight paragraph and I will just validate. I will click on this text frame, go on the text properties on the right, and we will justify the text first. And then I will keep a value of 12 point, and I will duplicate with Control D to place another one here. Oops. It's not going to work properly. Let's do this again, Control D, and I will duplicate. Oops. It's not going to work. It's strange. Control D. And as you can see, sometimes it's not working properly. When it's like this, just go on the left here and you can just duplicate using this one. And I will duplicate again. I will select item duplicate or Control D item duplicate. Now let's place different image frame. I will create image frame on this area like this, and I will go right click. I will get the image and I will select the image with a row. I will double click. I will go on the image properties, and in the image property, first, I will use to frame size rescaling, I will increase a little bit of size and double click, and we can change the position of the image. We can adjust and place maybe the image here. I will duplicate again, I will go and edit item duplicate, and I will duplicate and I will place another one maybe around this area on the bottom right corner like this, and I will scale little bit on these directions. And then we will add another element. I will select the default shapes, circles, and will create a circle around here. And I will go right click. I will convert to what to image frames. And after to convert, we can integrate image. So right click Get image, and I will select the image with, for example, I have the image with the model, so this image, and we can go on to right image properties to frame size, rescaling, and we can increase the size and double click, and we can place the image on this area. I think I will replace the content inside for this one, so right click Get image, and I will link the image with the ocean I will put inside two frame size pre scaling. Let's increase it to be the size and then double click and take, for example, this area. Maybe this one we can extend a little bit and put into Pidr. So now let's apply what we have seen. So concretely what we have seen, it is how to put the content around frame. And from this, I will select this image. And after to select this image, I will go on the right, so properties. And the properties, you need to go in to shape properties as you can see. So on the properties panels, shape properties, and as I explained, you can find this one, and I can put the text around the frame shapes just like this first. Now if I move, you can see the text is going to move around the image. Even if I'm moving here, the text is going to move around. So I can define my position and maybe we can stay like this when you are in this direction. But if I wanted to apply a specific space, as I explained, you can use what I have explained before. Now we are going to work with, for example, this one. I will click here, I will go into shape options and we'll click on this area. In this case, I want to define a space around the circle. What we can do, we click first on text flow around frame shapes, Edit, and here we can edit the contour lines. After to edit the contour lines, we can activate a percentage value to enlarge. Or we can apply a millimeter value. And here in this area, maybe we can apply 6 millimeters. And if I apply six millimeter, you can click here enlarge, and you can see the small hotlines appearing here and we can enlarge with a value of 6 millimeters. If I just validate, don't forget after to display that to click on text flow around the control line. As I explained, you need to do this first because if you click on text flow around the control line and then you edit, it's not going to work properly. It's a little strange, but it's like this. So you need first to click here, then edit, you adjust, and then after you can click on TextFlow around the control line. And thanks to that, we can define this space. Even if I move, you can see the text is going to move around and at the same time to move around, we have still this space with 6 millimeters, and definitely it's convenient just like that. Now the last thing that I'm going to do is this image. As you can see, we have this image. If, for example, I extend this image here and I want to have a space on the left here, or maybe I'm going to extend a video image here, I would like to have a space on this area. And a little bit on the top, how I can process, I will go on this area. I will go on the shape properties, and I will click textflow around the image, how the text is going to be around, but the problem is here it's not pretty good. So how we can process, you can click on the image frame. You can go on first text flow around frame shape, Edit, and you can use Edit to control line. You define the value that you want here. Let's put, for example, 8 millimeters large, and you can find outline with eight millimeter. We can use these outline values to put the text around this area and to define a space with 8 millimeters. I just click and validate. Don't forget to switch after for text flow around the contour line, and you can see now we have this space here. And depending on what you do, sometimes you need to adjust. So for example, if I just my frame image, I can adjust on the top as well. It depends. Sometime you can also be able to adjust the image frame depending on what you want to do, for example. In this case, maybe we can reduce until this area, just like that. And as you can see, we can define the space that we need around our image. And I can click here. We can activate the preview. So as you can see, it's definitely pretty convenient to use this feature when you want to wrap your text around any frame. It can be an image, but it can be a shape. You can also convert to different shapes. It's going to work in the same way. So it's okay for that. I'm going to remove the different guides, and we are going to be okay with these features. It's called manage guide, I will select this one, delete the guide from the current page or pages here, and I will go on the file. I will select the document setups, and in the document setup, we define margins. I will apply a value of zero. I will activate the change and I will just validate like this. 40. Create tables part 1: We're going to see how to work with tables. For this something that we can do it is to go on this area and on this area, you can find tables. After to do this type of work, I can click on the table tools and I can go left click to generate tables. So we can click on these tools and left click and you can enter the number of rows and columns. So for example, if I want to have four rows or two columns, I can apply maybe maybe a number of rows at a number of columns at six and a number of rows at four. And if I just validate, I can do something like that. After that, you have the possibility to adjust your table. So to adjust your table, first, you can scale your table. You just need to click on your selection tools, and with your section tool, you can just scale your tables as you can see. So you can scale your tables just like that. After to scale your table, you have the possibility to take a look on the preview because here you have some hotline, but you just outline when you are working. So it means the final render will be this one, as you can see. So it is important to understand that the final render will be like this. If you want to remove colons or you want to remove rows or at columns or rows, you can go on table here and you can insert rows or insert colons. For example, if I scan, I can reduce like this or I can reduce like this. I have the possibility to go on insert rows. I can, for example, insert to rows at the beginning or at the end, and as you can see, I can insert to rows or I can go on page here. I can go on table, I can insert columns, and I will insert two columns maybe at the end as well. You can add something like this. So the way to process is, first, I'm going to delete this table. I will select one more time the table tools, and I will go left click here, and I will define a number of rows with, for example, I will define just three and the columns I will define four, just like that. Now what we will do we place the table around here and something that we will add, it is content. To add content, you double click inside inside a frame just like that, and you can tape your content. For example, I will tape just content O here on this area, I will tape content, two on this area, I will tape content three, and on this area I will tape content for. Now if you want to adjust the content inside your table, it means maybe you want to put in the center, you can select your content just like that. You can select the content. And you can go into text property and you can repeat the same thing that in a frame text. It means you can center horizontally and vertically, you will center in column and text distance, vertical meant M dal. And this is how you can center. I can repeat here, I can select the text here because if you select the cells, you will address the cells on the right with the properties. I'm going to show you this after. So first, I will define this one and I will click on Center here. And on this area, I will click on Center as well. So it means here, MDL. I will select this one and I will click on Center and on this area MDLs I will click on this one. I will select Center and on this area, I will go on MDL, just like that. So after to do this work, I have put this content here. I wanted to show you again how you can ask rods and colons. If you go on here, you can insert rows and colons. But you have also the possibility to double click. And when you double click, you can just select a cell. And to select a cell, you just need to dragging and moving the mouse, for example, I can select these cells. And this cell can be a reference or I can select and dragging and moving to select these cells. And now if I go on table, I can delet to rows or dile it to colons, just like that, for example. If I want to insert a rose, I will click on Insert, I will click on the table, Insert. Insert a rose, I will add once maybe at the beginning, as you can see, and I will go on, insert a columns once at the beginning as well. Now if I want to delete a colons, for example, I can just select here. I will go on, I will select here, and I will go on table and I will delete the rows just like that. Or I can select the cells, and I will go on table and delete the colons and I can come back with this type of content, for example. You have also the possibility when you go on table to distribute the rows and evenly end the columns. For example, you can drag and double click inside, and as you can see, you can change the position of the rows and colons. So you can adjust the line just like this. Or I can adjust the line also like this. You can adjust the different space dragging and moving. And if you want to recuperate what you need, you can just click on the table, and you can distribute the rows evenly or distribute the colon in Val. But before to do this, you can double click, for example, and select colons just like this. And in this columns, you can go on the table feature set colons wide. And if I want, for example, have a columns wise of maybe 60 millimeter, I will tape 60 and I have created a colons wide with 60. If I want to define the size of the rows, maybe of this one, I can click on this, and it will adjust the row for all this area. And for this, I can go on table, set row eight, and you can take a look about the ruler with the dimension that we have, and I would like maybe just 20 millimeter, and I will create a space with 20 millimeters. So as you can see, it's definitely convenient. Now, if you want to recuperate your table with original size. What does it mean, it means space even for the columns and the rows. You can click on the table. When you go on this area, you have distribute rows evenly. If I click here, I can recuperate the same space between the different rows, the same dimensions. Now I can go also on table and I will be able to distribute columns evenly and I can recuperate this type of content. So what we will do we click on the table with scale little bit of table on this area and the table on this area. And here we have the text, and I would like to adjust little bit. So for this, I will double click inside, and we'll dragging and moving little bit this line on this area because we have the text and I will reduce this one. And now if I select this, as you can see, you can go on table. And if you select distribute rows evenly, it's going to be applied only on my selection. So if you apply, for example, I'm going to show you again. If, for example, I'm dragging and moving this, I click a drag and moving this. And I don't want to touch this one. So if you select all the table, you will apply this on all the table. So it means you will apply these options on all the table. But if you grab a selection of cells, like for example, this one, I will apply only on the selection, and now I can go on table, distribute rose evenly, and only for this selection. This is why it can be useful as well. 41. Create tables part 2: We are going to continue with the tables. And for this, something that we are going to do it is to zoom in this area. And I'm going to show you how you can edit the different area, so it means the table with the properties. Congratly when you click on the table here, and on this area, we will have the content properties replaced by table properties. So here we have content properties. If you select a table, it will be replaced by table properties, exactly like image properties and text properties. As you can see it is definitely very convenient. And this is why this Content property s panel, it's extremely important and extremely useful. Now if I click on the table property, I can zoom on this area and I can take a look on the right. And if I take a look on the right, you can find the table with default table style here, and we can also crat table style. So I will show you how you can crat styles, and it's also possible to crat table style. And when I just go here, you have feel. First, you need to understand. You need to understand here the cells, the wide of the cells and the wide of the frame. If you want to change the wide of the frame, you click on the table and the wide of the frame will be in the property panel. So it means when you go on line here, you have the possibility to define a value on this area. And if you define a value, you can increase the size. But the problem is when I go here, I see colors, and for example, you go on stroke and you can activate just a stroke like this. But as you can see, it's not going to be displayed properly because here you have none and you can also apply a solid color. But here, you cannot manage directly, so you need to use the table properties. As you can see, if I click on Stroke, I can apply your value, I can come back to the line options, and as you can see, it's not going to be displayed properly. What I will do I will click on stroke, no, I will go back on the right, and here I will decrease the line Y to zero, just like that. Now if I take a look to the table properties, you can fill with a color and you can fill all the table with a color, just like this on the backgrounds. So you can just select a color just like this on the backgrounds with a shared value, so just the transparency value that you can adjust on this area for your colors. Let's just come back with 100%. So here it is a background column. If you don't want, you just come back to null. Now you have this element, and this element, if you just click here, this element concerns the table, and as you can see, it will focus on what it will focus on all the frame outside frame, this frame, not the cells inside. So here you are not going to adjust the cell inside. You adjust the frame of your table, so you define a size. You can also adjust the style just like that. So then you need to wait a little bit, and you can adjust the type just here. We can adjust the size here. We can come back to this type, and this is how we can process. So here, when you click on this area, you can focus on the outside part. Now if you want, you can also change the color and you can change the color of the stroke outside just like this. You just need every time to come back. Click here if you want to adjust again. And if you don't want any color, you can even remove the color, but it's not extremely convenient. If you click here, you will have something like this for the table. So as you can see. Now we'll click on the table in the table properties, we come back. We'll click here. So this one is the outside part. Now after to understand that, I will come back to the black color. You have the element inside, and to edit the element inside, you need to select the cell. And when you are like this, you can, for example, double click and you can select the cells. And if you select all the cells like this, you have the possibility to click on this area and this will work on all the cells selected, as you can see. And now we work on all the different cells inside. And I can put, for example, four maybe, and you can change the color also inside by Selc blue, as you can see, we obtain this render. You need to understand this type of properties. You go in the table properties. Here, you focus on the outside part if you don't select any cells, but if you double click and you select all the cells, you can just change the cells, and I will come back for example, with black here. Now you can also adjust just an element. So it means you can adjust something without the top. And in this case, if I just adjust like this, I will adjust without the top here. And sometimes it's convenient because, for example, I'm going to click here and I will adjust with the top again. We can just come back here. Why you have a plus because you can add another style. For example, you can just click here and you can apply another way. So here, for example, I'm outside, just like that. But if I select some cells like the cells on the right, I can click Plus, and for this one, I can just change. And maybe I can double click and I can select this one, and for this one, I can crack plus, and I can change only also for this one. You can see you can make different things depending on the cells. Now if I want to come back with the same value, I will click on all the tables. And here, these types I will remove, and I will click on this one. And for example, I will apply to. Now if I want to apply to on the sales, I will double click and I will just select all, and I will just click on this one, and I will apply to as well on all the element with this tile. Now if I click outside, I will obtain this render. I will select the tables, and I will go on the top right corners, preview mode, and this is how to grate tables. Oops, I think I forgot I will adjust again this one. To adjust, you need to repre this view and I will select this area and I can distribute the rows evenly just like this. This is how we can craft table. You can add more content inside. As you can see, I can also scale my table and you need to understand this table property extremely useful. First, you go tables and here you have these different options when you want. You can also merge the cell and split the cells. I'm going to show you. You can double click on all this area. Can select all this area. And when you go on table, you can merge the cells. And in this case, you can only create one cells as you can see. And if you just click here, select the cells, you can go on tables, and you have the possibility to merge just like that. Can also select different cells like you can select this one or you can also select maybe this one or you can just select two cells just like this and you can also merge the cell. In this case, we'll have only one content. If I select these two, I will go on merge cells, and I will have only one content, as you can see. And I can, for example, replace if I need different number just like that. So you have also the possibility to merge the cells. So it's okay for that. This is how we can create tables. 42. Create styles part 1: We're going to see how to work with styles. And for this something that we are going to do it is first, we are going to crat content, and after we'll see how to crat styles. First, I will go on the left here and in the file, I will go into document setups. And in the document setups, we will focus on the margins. I will define a margins with a value of ten, and I will activate the proportions here, and I will apply to all pages. So after that, I will zoom a little bit on this area, and we'll separate the page page, manage guide, and we'll separate the page. We can add guide. Here we are horizontal, and here we are vertical. So what we can do, we can not guide will apply columns, and I will define one columns, and I will use a gap. I will use a gap of 10 millimeters, so we'll apply 10 millimeters. And here we'll apply also sue rows with ten millimeter as well. I will put this from the margin applied to all pages. Now what we will do will create a textframe. I will create a textframe here. First, I will zoo little bit, I will go in the page. I will activate Snap two guides and I will just go here. I will activate Snap two items as well. Then we will double click and we will tap title content. I will just tape title content just here, and I will go on the right. I will go into text properties and the text property will just put the text in the center center and we will use column and text distance, and here we'll select Midols. We can at the same time just increase little bit to size just like that, and I will adjust little bit on these directions. Now I will duplicate this one. I will press Control D, I will duplicate, and I will press Control D, and I will duplicate again. I will select this swift frame text and I will press Control D and we duplicate to place on this area. Now what we will do we add content as well. I will select the text tools here, and we will snap around this a until this a and we will double click, right click sample text, and we will apply sample text here. What I will use, I will use, for example, this one, and I will define maybe six paragraph and I will just validate. So text will appear here. I will select all the text, and at this moment, I will just define maybe ten, and I will apply the value for all the contents. I will go here and I will define maybe ten as well. I like that. Maybe here, yes, we can define ten. I think it's not extremely convenient. Let's first go back to 12 and we're going to craft a style, so it will be more convenient. So I will press Control D, I will duplicate, and I will press Control D, I will duplicate again. And then we'll go here. I will press Control D, I will duplicate. I could duplicate those at the same time, but I'm going to do individual way, it's going to work as well, and I will press Control D, and I will duplicate as well. So when you add a frame text, when you click on frame text in the text property, you can find this default paragraph style and default caracter style, and you can replace by something that you can create. How to create a style. To create a style, you go on the top corner here. And when you go edit, you can create a style. So edit and you can create a style. Now after to do this work, you can create to paragraph style character table style, sale style line style. I'm going to show you with a paragraph and the character, but you can also do the same thing with a table, a sale, or a line. So first, let's create to character style. I will click on Character Style here, and I will go anew. And when you go new here, you can select what type of style you want to Crat. I will select a new character style. After to do this work, you can change the name. And for this style, I will tape, for example, title style, number one, and you just create the style that you need. So for example, you define the font family that you want. In this case, I will define, for example, the font family camea. I will define the style if I want to have bold or not. I will define bold. I will define a size. I will use maybe 16. You can define the space between the letter, for example, you can also define the size of the litter. I will put 100 tens. Here I will put 100 tens, and here maybe 2%. I'll select the language and I will define a color. Let's just change the color. As you can see, this is just a basic parameter that you can use with a character style, you will be able to apply this on multiple elements at the same time and I will show you after why it is useful. First, let's create different style here. You have also the font feature, but let's just keep like this and I will click on Apply. I created my first style. Let's create another character style, new character style, and I will create another one. Title style number two, just like that. And I will change. I will define maybe an order from family. Let's select, for example, I will select. I will select this one, GaduGi. I will define a size maybe 14, and I will define also just a color. I will switch for the blue color just like this, and I will increase maybe the space between the later, 10%. We'll just click on a plan. So now we have created two style like this. If you want to create a paragraph style, it is exactly the same way to process. You go edit, define style, and instead to go new and to create a new character style, you can do the same thing for a paragraph style. You can rename and I will tape pa graph style number one, just like this. And I will go on this area, paragraph style number one, and I will be able to define some parameters. The difference when you have a paragraph style is you have the properties for the character, but you can find also the property for the paragraph. So you have the two things. And the character, generally, you use the character properties you use the character properties, only a character style it's only title. And if you create content like paragraph, you use a paragraph style. First, in the paragraph style, you can define a character. So on more time, you can define the font family that you want. I will define maybe what we use, we will use maybe countdown. After the style, we can switch. I will use regular. I will define a value of maybe ten, just like this. And I will use maybe black color here. At the same time, you can go in the paragraph effect and you can also in the properties if you need. And here see the properties of the paragraph. For example, you can justify your text. You can change the fixed line spacing. You can also define optical margin. You can also have access to advanceating, like some space wide, or here, you can also define a space from the first line, and on the first line, I can define a space like this. You can also adjust with the color and here's the color on the background. I'm just going to click on apply and create this new style, and I will create last one new paragraph style again, and I will define graph style number two, just like this. So paragraph style number two, and after to define paragraph style number two, I will go on this array. And I will adjust. What we will adjust, we will use, for example, here, I will define justification one more time. I will increase first before I will go into character style, and I will select before my font family. Let's select to Loder one. I will select maybe let's select Lato font family. I will define ten. I will use maybe a little bit more space between the letters, 100%, and I will use maybe the red colors just like that. Or maybe anoer one. I would select the green color to change. And after that, I will go into properties, and in the property we justify. We will use the fixed line spacings, and at the same time, I will just validate this one, and I created another paragraph style. So at this moment, at this moment, we have created two character style. So we have this one and this one. Is two character style, you can edit after, and we have created two paragraph style, this one, and this one. After I will explain how you can apply and why it is useful. 43. Create styles part 2: We're going to continue with the styles and for this, something that we can do. It is to go on this area, and we're going to see how to apply the style. So to apply a style, we have created different styles, as I explained before. Now to apply a style, you can click on the text frame, and you can apply the style that you want in the text properties. So I will go on the right and I will define the text properties. In the text properties, you have the paragraph style here, and we can see our two paragraph styles and the character style. From the title, I will apply a character style. From this one, I will apply, for example, the title style. Number one, and I will click here and I will apply the title style number one as well, and I will click here and the title style number one. And as you can see, you can apply the style. Why it is useful because if you have, for example, multiple pages, multiple titles, you don't need to you can just apply the style. Simple reason that if after, for example, you want to change the dimension or you want to change the color, instead to change, for example, 100 titles, you will just only change the style, and the change will be applied to the 100 titles. So if you have only one page, generally, it's not useful to write a style. But if you have a lot of page, a lot of titles, and you want to apply the same properties, you can write the styles. Now I will click on this one, and I will define also the title style number two. This one I will define the title style number two here, and this one the title style number two. And I will repeat the process with my paragraph. I will click on this paragraph, but this time, I will use paragraph style. And I will define the paragraph style number one. I will click here, and I will define the paragraph style one and this one I will define maybe the paragraph style one as well. And I will click on this one. I will define the paragraph style number two. I will click on this one, the paragraph style two, and this one, the paragraph style two. As you can see, I apply my different styles on my different areas just like that. And for this, you just need to go in the text properties. This is why it's extremely important to have these properties, and you can replace with the character style that you want. Now why it is useful because as I explained, you can edit the style and the style will be apply directly on what you have. For example, I can go and edit, I can define style, I can edit the style. If I edit my title style number one, for example, I would like to change from family to try another one, for example, will select maybe this one. And I would like to change maybe the colors. I would like to have, for example, come back with blue colors, so I will select the blue colors. And if I just validate, as you can see, the change will be made directly here. And as you can see, we can just have the change here. You don't need to change every title. You can just change the style. So here we only have three element, but if you have 100 element, you understand why it is efficient and useful. Here it is same, for example, I will change this paragraph. I will go on edit here, we will select styles, and I will edit my paragraph style number one, for example, we will change the spacing like maybe 18, I will apply space for the first line, and something that I will do, I will change in the character style will change the color, and I will apply red. And I will just click on Apply. And as you can see, the change have been made on this different element. You can repeat this process for any type of elements that we have, so it means I want to change the style number two, I can change the style number two. I want to change maybe the font family, I can change the font family like this and I can just apply. I will just crate another one. I will select maybe this one. I will select this one and I can just click on apply. If I want to edit my paragraph number two, I will go directly on these options. I will go on edit and we will apply style and I will sex the paragraph number two. I want, for example, to edit the character style or want to properties or to change the color again. I will select this blue color, I will click on apply and as you can see, we can just change like that. At any moment, you can come back on down and have a summary of your element. You have the possibility to click on element and to clone the element. Why it is useful to click on Clone because if you click on Clone, you can recuperate base that you have. For example, if I clone this one, I could rename, for example, and I can recuperate this base. So I can recuperate the base of the paragraph style two to adjust and to make modification or if I select the title style two, I can also click on Clone and after to click on Clone, I can adjust with this base. If you want to delete a star, you can click on Delete, and at the opposite, you can delete a star. You can click on this one, delete, and I will just validate or I can click on this one, delete, and I will validate. Something that you can do as well. If I just get out, you can come back with a basic style. If you want to remove a style, you just need to click on your frame, and you go on this area. And for example, we have the title style one, I just need to come back to the fourth character style, and in this case, I can come back here. Even if you have your style style number one, if you want to adjust, after you can adjust. Even if you apply the style, if you want to make some adjustment after you can adjust as you can see, for example, you can change the size, you can adjust the properties, I can just change the color. So even if you want to change after you can change. So it means you can apply the style, but you can edit after if you need. And if I want to come back, you can also go on to default Carter style just like this. So you can come back and adjust if I want to come back to my style, I will define again the title style number one. Now, if you want to remove a style, you need to be careful because if you remove a style, you need to choose by what you want to replace. So, for example, if I go on the eight panels and I define style, you can define and you can delete. I can go and edit here to extend the panels just like that, and you can also reduce just like this. So gredly if I reduce title style one, if I decide to delete, it's going to ask me by what I want to replace, and you can replace by another Style. It can be the title Style two in this case, but you can use the default character style, or it can be also no style. For example, the title Style two, I will click on Delete and I will apply Nosti and when you click on No style, it is like the default style. Here, in this case, no style or the default style, it is the same because I didn't edited the default style. By default, we have a default paragraph style and a default character style. So you can use this one to edit as well that we have by default. But generally, I can advise you to write your own new style instead to edit this default style. If I just continue with delete, I will delete, for example, the paragraph style number one. And I will just click on delete. He's going to ask to me, and I can use the default paragraph style, for example, or none. Or I can select the paragraph style number two. I can click on delete, and it is same. I can select the default paragraph style or nosty select nosty going to work because it is the same in this case. This is how you can work with these panels to create new styles. You can even impart a created that you can sell as well. So this is how we can work with the style. So as you can see, it's pretty convenient if you have multi page, multiple titles, multiple paragraph, you can create two styles, and then you can just adjust the style instead to adjust all the frames, all the text frame. So it's okay for that. We are going to go on this area. We'll go on page manage guide, and I will remove all the guides like this, and I will go in the file. I will go in the document setup as well. We will select here margins and bleeds. I will come back with a value of zero, and I will apply the proportion and apply this to all pages. 44. Master layers part 1: We're going to see how to work with layers for this something that we can do, we are going to create different layers and then we will see how to work with the layers. P to displace the layer panel, we have displayed the layer panels on the bottom right corners. When I go on the top here, you can find layers. At the beginning, we have activated the layer panels. Even if we don't use too much this layer panels in this software, it's possible in some way to use this one. First thing to do with a background layer. What does it mean? It means that if you don't create any layers, all the elements will be displayed directly on the same layers. To create a new layers, you can activate plus here and you can add a new layers. I will create a new one. On these new layers, I will rename and I will create a rectangle on the background. I will just rename with rectangle. You can rename a layer, just double click to rename. I will zoom a little bit, I will activate page Snap two guide. We will use the rectangle tools. And with rectangle tools, I will add rectangles on the background just like this. Then I will go on the right here. I will go in colors and in colors, I will display the blue colors, and I will extend until this area. This will be, for example, my color. Background, I could place also on the background, but I prefer to display a new one. Now let's create another one. I will click here one more time, click on Plus, and I will create new layers. It will be something like header layers, so we tape headers. And on the top, I will select the image frame and we'll create the image frame around this area will adjust and we will snap to the border of the page, and we will replace by an image. Right click Get Image, and I will select the image with the rod, double click here. I will go in the image properties to frame size, prescale increase the size of the image and then double click to adjust a little bit the position inside. I will add also a text frame on the front. I will select the text frame tools. I will create a text frame around this area and double click to add content. I will tape title example. And something that I will do, I will click on my text frame, and first things to do, I will go in the properties, general properties to activate a color on the frame. I will define the red color, and then we will activate the text properties, and in the text properties will increase the size of the text first I will increase the size, I will put something like 40. I will adding to the center and at the same time in color and text distance will reduce the vertical gigment and we will select bottom. I can also place my text with another colors. And for this, I will select colors and effect and we will switch black for white, just like that. I can adjust little bit the size of my rectangle. I can adjust like this and we will put around this area as you can see. You can find directly. If you go on page here, I will activate Snap two item, and thanks to that, I can find as you can see the center of the image frame to place this text in the center. Just so after to do this type of work, I will create another layers. I will click here plus and we create another layers I will rename for content. And in this layer, we'll just add text. I will select the text tools, and with the textFrame tools, I will create a text frame around this area, and I will double click here to edit the content, right click. Define sample text. And in the sample text, we will adjust with a camera just like that. But we'll adjust with a camera view, and we will put, we will put a value of paragraph, just maybe eight paragraph. I will activate this language, validate, and I created this content. I will select all the content here. I will just click on the text frame, go on the right, we switch the color, we put is, and at the same time, I will justify my text, hing and justify left. We can change a little bit the size, I will put a 14 here, but in this scale, just keep 12, it's going to work properly. I will adjust a little bit the size of my text here, and I will put in the center as well, just like that. So now at this moment, if I take a look to my panels, we have four different layers, four different layers. We have this one, the background layers. We have this one, rectangle, this one, and this one. To see the layers, you have to option. These layer panels. This is the most convenient because you can manage the layers. But when you go on the bottom, for example, you don't have these panels, you have the possibility to click here, and on this area, you have a summary of the different layers. So if I click on this one, I will be on the content layers. If I click on this one, I will be on the layers. If I click on this one, I will be on the rectangle layers and this one on my original background layers. And here we have a total of four different layers. So you can select a layer just clicking on this area. Or on this layer panel, you can also click on the layer that you want, as you can see. You can click on the layers that you want as well. After that, I'm going to show you the different option because you can switch for ground by grounds for the layers. But you can also take a look here and you can activate the preview options. And thanks to that, you can display your different layers or just your document to see the different frames. This is the first things to understand. You go on the top view, you go on the top windows. You can open these layer panels. On this layer panel, you can display what you want we display in the bottom right corner in this case, and you can create new layers with plus, rename the layers, and you can select the layer that you need, weather on these panels, weather on these panels. 45. Master layers part 2: We're going to continue with the layers. We have seen how to create new layers. And how we can put content on these new layers. But as I explained before, on the bottom right corner, we have displayed these layer panels. I created a total of four different layers. When I go on this area, you have a small color code and you can switch this color code. It just an information for you. It's not extremely useful. I just information for you. If you have a lot of layers, you can put the same color code on what you need. For example, if I click on this one, I can define another color. I would like maybe ornge for this. If for this one, I click here and I want to apply clear blue colors as an information, I can click on this one. If this one I want to put yellow, I can put yellow. If this one I want to put some purple, I can put purple. So you can define some color code. Sometimes it is useful because you can have multiple layers and put the same color code on different layers here. But it's just about information, nothing more. The second thing is the preview. Here you have make layers visible. So if I zoom a little bit here, I select the content layers and you can deactivate the view of the layers on your document. Here for the header that can deactivate the view, here for this rectangle, and this one for the background, but we don't have anything special on the background. Also for the impression when you go into Scribus here, have the possibility to directly print from the software, so you can directly print here. You have also the possibility to click on this area and to print. And if you deactivate some layer for the printing options, you will not print the layers that you not check. So for example, here, you have these options, print layers unchecked to disable printing. So if for example, I disable here, I will disable the printing of the text on this area. If I decide to disable the rectangle on the backgrounds, I will disable the rectangle of the backgrounds from the printing options. Now if we just continue, you can also local layer. Why to loc layer? Because I'm going to show you an example, I have this rectangle layer, and sometimes you can work and maybe by default, you will maybe dragging and moving your element by default. So if you don't want to have this problem, what if you don't want to have this problem, you have the possibility, I'm going to come back with my history panels to log the layers. For this, you can click here and you can log the layers. If you log the layers, now I click on the rectangles and I want to move my blue rectangle, as you can see, I cannot do anything because I lock these layers. Sometimes it is useful, but you can also log just an object. When you go on this area, you have the possibility to log on an object or, as you can see, enable or disable also when you want to print an object. It works for object, but it works also for layers. And for this, you can just deactivate this one. On this area, you make text in lower layer flow. It's a little bit specific. I can advise you to keep every time this check it's pretty better. Here Outline mode, wireframe is just that when you click here, you can display the object in a wireframe way. For example, here you can see the frame in wireframe, but click on the header, you can see the display in wireframe. So it means we are not going to see temporarily the image. If you click on the rectangle wireframe, so you are not going to display the color, and that's it. So here you can you can just activate deactivate the wireframe when you are on this area. And the last possibility is select top here layer. When you click here, you can select the object or the layers automatically when you activate this one. This is the first things to understand. I'm going to zoom out. The second things to understand is the position for ground backgrounds. So here you have different arrows. When you click here, it's not possible to dragging and moving layers to the front or to the bottom. So layers on the top will be on the front, the layer on the bottom on the back, and you can change the position. Example, if I select this text content here. And I decide to move here just like that, and you can see I'm not going to see my content anymore for the simple reason that I put on the backgrounds. If I come back here, I'm not going to see because the rectangle is in still in front. And if I click here, I can put the content now just on the top. And if I put here, I can put the content on the top as well. So on this area, you can switch foreground to background and layers and you can change as you can see the position of the different layers on this area. To create a new layers, as I explained, you can click here. You can just create new layers. If you want to remove layers, you can click on Minus, and on Minus, you can remove a layer. So here I can remove, here I can remove, and here I can remove. When you have the layers, you can work with two options, the blend mode and the opacity. Concretely, what does it mean? The blend mode, if I select my headers will be depending on the layers that you have on the back, you can switch for ano blend mode and you can have different type of random. If I select overlay, you can see the image and the color of my rectangle will be displayed in a different way, depending on the layers that we have below. And sometimes it is interesting to gratific more when you work with images on layers. This one is a blend mode. The other thing that we can do is this to change the transparency of a layer. So here I can change the transparency of the layers exactly like, for example, when you are an object, and sometimes it is useful to prorate it. Even for the text, sometimes you can just for the text instead to change the color. If I select my content layers here, I can just decrease a little bit of transparency and put less transparency on my text just using the percentage value. It is another way to process. So here's a blend mode to write different type of incrustation effect, and here this one. Possibility to duplicate the layer as well. For example, I have this content. If I click here, I can duplicate, and as you can see, you can duplicate the layer. So for example, if I select here, as you can see, I created another one with more text and more. You can duplicate layers clicking on this area, just like that. If I want to delete a layer again, I will click on this area, I will delete and delete all the object I'm going to validate. I will click here. If you have content on the layers, they will ask if you want to remove as well, and you can delete the different layers just like that. So this is how we can work with layers. So we have explained all the different features that you can use in this panel. 46. Work with pages part 1: We're going to see how to work with pages. And for this, when you start like this, you can find this page. When you go on the top, you can find page and you have the possibility to insert a page to copy page to delete page to move page. So first, something that I'm going to show you, as I explained before, you can go on Window and extremely useful to click on Arrange page. And thanks to that, we can place these panels on the left. We have the Master page. I will explain just after how you can work with master and it will be interesting to use with pages. By default, we just have normal MasterPage apply on all the pages, and here you can find document page. We have a four page. First thing is to understand how you can add a page. To add a page, you can go on page here, and you just need to click on Insert and you can insert to page before or after. Before to do this, I will create rectangles here. And I will go on page. I will use SnapTGuide and I will use Snap two items. I will create rectangles around this area and around this area as well, just like this. I will extend this rectangle until this. No, after to do this type of work, something that we will do we have our rectangles on this area. We will keep the red colors and I will insert the page insert and you can define a number. For example, I would like to define maybe six page, after or maybe more, maybe eight pages, maybe let's try 66 page at the end. And the master page, we only have one, so I will just validate like this. As you can see now, I have a total of six page. We can scroll down and we have a total of seven page. When you go on the left here, you can see a summary of the different page that you have. If you want to add page before, for example, before the page one, you go on page, you select Insert, and I'm going to insert, for example, see pages before the page number, and you can define what page you want. In this case, I will apply see pages before the page number one. Don't forget that if you select over master page sizing, concretely, you can also have different size of page. And even inside the same document, if you want to mix different size of page, it's possible. We don't do this too much, but it's possible as well. And for this, you can use override. I will just validate. And as you can see, I created two pages before this one. On the first one, the first one, I will zoom here, and I will create a rectangle with different colors just to see how to manage the pages. So I will create a rectangle with different colors. I will go on colors on the right just like this, and I will define the blue colors, for example, I will define the blue color just here. And after to do this type of work. So we have this one. If you want to select a page, for example, I have this one. You can select a page, you just double click and when you double click, you will be redirected to the page that you need. So, for example, if I want to come back to the page one, double click and I will be on the one here on the two, here on the sui, here on the four. So you can just double click to be redirected by on the page that you want on this area. When you go in the page feature here, you can also copy and pass a page. So for example, I select my page number one. And I have the possibility to go on page and to select copy. And I can define a number, not only one. If for example, I want to copy, I can define two. I can define copy page the number one, and I would like maybe to copy and at the end or before one more time. I will select at the end, and I will create copy page number one and two copies of the page number one. I will just validate. And thanks to that, as you can see if I go at the beginning, just here, I created two copy of the page number one, just like that. And now I have a total of 12 pages. And I created the two copy at the end, as you can see. To copy will appear here. If you want to delete a page, how you can do this. You go on page and you can click on delete. And when you click on Delete, you can delete by example, I'd like to delete the two last. So I will delete. For example, here, in this case, it will be ten to 12. Or in this case, it will be on the 11 to 12, so the two last page, and I will just validate and that's it. I deleted the two last pages to only keep ten pages as well. Now, something that I wanted to show you also, it is how you can move a page. To move a page, how you can do this, you can just drag and moving a page here and you can move a page in different positions. For example, I move the page with a blue rectangle and I can come back on this area. You just need to drag and move. Other way to move a page will be to go on page here and to go on move. This is another way to process. For example, you can move the page for example, the one, I can move the page one and I can move the page one to six, for example, we can put just before or just after we click at the end. After page after page. Here, we can move the page the number of page. I would like to move only the first one. I will select move the page one to one after what is the page after maybe the six. I will just validate and that's it. I move my page number one, which is once initially here and I move this page on the position six, just like that, and you can see we are in the position six as well. Something that we are going to do it is to go on page here and I'm going to remove different pages. After I will show you how to work with double page. First we will go on page here, I will select this one and I will go on delete and on delete, what I will do? I will delete all the pages, expect the first one. I will go on two, and here we will go two until ten, and I will just lit it. And thanks to that, I can come back with only this one. So we only have now only this page. And after I'm going to show you how you want to process, if you need to work is double page. 47. Work with pages part 2: We're going to continue with the pages. We have seen how to add pages. So as explained, if you want to add pages, you can go on page here and you can click on Insert. And when I click on Insert, I can define a number of page. For example, I would like to add maybe I will add ten pages, and I would like to add ten pages at the end, and I will sect the Master page normals and I will just validate. So now you can see I have 11 pages. If I want to add another one, I will go on page, I can click on Insert, and I can insert more if I need or if I want to insert, maybe see, I will insert se. So now I have, for example, 14 pages. We have seen also how to delete pages. So to delete pages, I can go on page here, and I can delete. And what I will delete, I will delete, for example, the page, I will go at the end to last page 14, so I will delete maybe page 12, two page 13 and 14. And I will just validate with this one. So now we have a total of 12 pages. How you can work with a double page. So to work with a double page, one more time on this panel, it is very convenient. Concretely, you have the document layer here, and we are in single page and you can switch single page for facing page. And in this case, as you can see, we have different facing page. The first page, why the first page is located on this area? The first page is located on this area because generally when you read a book, you turn the cover, the first page will start on the right. So this is why by default, we have the first page here. But concretely, if you want to do this way and you want to make, for example, creation only on the double page, you can also switch first page E, and now you can switch for F page just like that. And here you can drag page also when you go on this area. Concretely, you have this element, drag pages or master page into the trash to delete this. Sometimes you can use this feature, but it's not extremely convenient, in my opinion. So as you can see, we have now double page. We have six double page and you can also double click here. And on this area, if you want one more time to work with some content, I can, for example, create rectangles here and create the content on this one, and I can create rectangles. And as you can see, I can also work with this one. And I will go on the colors, and the colors features, I will change for this one. I will say these two rectangles. We shift and I will press Control D, I will duplicate, and I will put this one. Here, we just change the colors of the rectangle. So first, we'll click out. We'll click on these rectangles. Yellow, we'll click on this one, green, and as you can see, I can change the content just like that. So here we are working with double page. So at any moment, you can switch, so you can come back to right page just like that. But if you come back to right, you need to be careful because as you can see, the content will be move like this. And this is why you need to be careful. And if I come back to left, I will just upturn this render. If I come back to single page, we can come back here, and as you can see the content, for example, for this rectangle will be here. This is why sometimes you need to be careful when you switch double page because of the content. So it was just an example. So easy way to switch, you just go on this area and you can in a fast way use basing page, and you can start only with the right page if you need, and if you want to start with a left page, you can switch with a left. If I just come back to single page, just like this, forget that you have also the possibility to see on what page you are on the bottom here. And as you can see, we have on the page number, for example, you can also select the page that you want from the small panels just below. This panel can be interesting. You can click on this area and you can see the different pages and you can go directly on the page that you want. So it is another way to process. Why we have this process because sometimes some people don't use the window and don't use orange page panels. I think it's really convenient to use orange page panels when you work with pages, but sometimes some people don't use this and in this case, you can work with this and you can select on one page you want to go directly from these panels. You have also the possibility to move from a page to another one clicking here. You can move to the last page and you can move to the first page in a fast way, just like that. If I just come back to the page feature, so we have seen how to move page. So let's see again. I have the page number one. I'm going to click on Move, and let's see again how to process. I would like to move, for example, the page one and two. I will select one, two, two with two rectangle and I will switch, for example, I will move maybe after a page and I will move after maybe the page number six. I will move my two first pages after the page number six, and I will click here. Now if I just double click, page number one is located here and I have these two page. I want to move these two pages at the end, I will go on this one is the page number. This one is a page, this one, this one, five and six. I will go on page, I will select move, and I will select move the page five to six, and I will define at the end, and I will just validate now these two pages are at the end. So as you can see, it's convenient. The last thing that I'm going to show you again how to delete pages will go on page here, and I will delete pages. What I would like to delete, I will delete all the pages, expect the first one, so I will delete from two, and my last one is page number 12, so I will delete 2-12. And after to do this type of work, I will just click and validate, and I will come back with only one pages. So this is how we can work with pages, convenient way. As you can see, with range page panels, it's definitely very convenient to work with pages. 48. Work with masters part 1: We're going to see how to work with masters. So for this something that we are going to do to work with masters, it is to go on Window. And when you go on Window, extremely useful you can open the orange page panels, as I explained before, and I play the Orange page panels on the left. And thanks to that, you can manage pages, but you can also manage the Master Page. To edit a master, to create a master, you can just double click here. And when you double click, you can enter in Manage Master Page. And here you can return to normal page mode. Another possibility to process is to work with here Edit. And when you work on Edit, you can click on Master Page, and it's going to be same. You will be redirected to manage Master page. Now by default, you have a normal Master page. The normal MasterPage you don't have anything and you just something without any content. But you can put also on the normal MasterPage some content. But I can advise you to create MasterPage. While it is useful to create Master page, you can create a Master page when you have element same elements that you want to have on multiple pages at the same time. For example, you have a backgrounds or you create, for example, interior for the book with the same page that you repeat 100 time, you will create a Master page. Be thanks to that, you can apply the Master page on the number of page that you want. And if you want to edit, you won't have to edit 100 pages, but only to edit the Master page. So this is why it is useful. So let's create a First Master page to create a First Master page, you can click and add a new MasterPage. And I will create a new master, and I will tap Master number one, just like that. On this master number one, I will do some rectangles on the back, so I will create rectangles on the back. Just like this. I will check page Snap two guide and snap items, and I will put rectangles on the back, like this. After to do this type of work, I will define image. I will select the image frame, we craft image frame just on this area, and I will replace with right click Get image, and I will select the image with hoops, not this one or I will click on on this one. We'll click with this one. I will go on the right here and what we will do on the right, will go in the image properties, and in the image properties, we will adjust. For this, we can use two frame size and free scaling, and I will increase little do size. So here we can increases the size plus two frame size, and I can use free scaling, and I can increase little do size. And now I can double click and I can adjust to content inside, as you can see, and we will do something like this. Maybe I can adjust little bits of frame will reduce a little bit, and I will decrease little bits of size and double click and I can place this image just like that. Now, so this will be my first master, and I will create another one. I will create another one, and the der one will be the Master number two. And I will play the Master number two just here. On this Master number two, I will create rectangles also on the back just like that. And I will create the rectangles on the back. I will change in the property spanel the colors, and in the colors, I will define some blue colors. Then we will add also a text image frame here. I will define image frame and we insert image. I will go right click, I will use Get Image. And we have image with, for example, when I go here, I have image with a garden. I will click the image with a garden just like that, and I will go on the right image properties to frame size rescaling, and I will increase a little bit of size, and I will double click to adjust the position of my image just like that. So now, this one is a master one and this one is the master two, for example. Oops, I think I can adjust my image inside, double click, and I will jogging and moving, a little bit more just like that. So now let's come back to the page. First, something that you can do. You can have, for example, just blank page. If I insert, maybe I will insert five blank page at the end, just like that. So you can apply your master just dragging and moving. For example, you can dragging and moving the master one on the first page, for example, and I can dragging and moving like this. So it is a first way to process. You can just dragging and moving master page on the page. Another way to process, which can be more simple, it is to go on page here, and you have apply Master Page. And you can apply Master Page on PRN pages, for example, but it can be on page that you want. For example, I can apply my Master Page 123. I can apply the Master one. You can define the master that you want here, and I can apply 123, and I will just validate. So 123, I have the first master. Now I will continue. And I will Oops, I will go on page, and I will apply your Master page and I will select within range, and I will apply the Master number two, and the Master number two will be applied to four to six, and I will just validate like that. And as you can see, I apply my Master Page number two on these three pages. Another way to process to add a Master page, it is also you can create edges and directly insert the Master page. For this, when you click on page, you can insert edges, and directly I can apply the MasterPage. For example, I'm going to create sweep pages. At the end, for example, sweep pages at the end with the Master page number one. So sweep pages at the end with a Master page number one. And if I just validate like this, as you can see, I create it again, three new pages with a MasterPage number one. I will repeat this process. I will go on page, insert, and directly when you insert a page you can directly apply the master that you mode and I will create three other pages with a MasterPage number two, and I will just validate like that. And as you can see, we can find 12 pages, and we have the si four with, for example, this Master Page, then this one is Master Page, then this one is Master Page, and then this one is this Master page. You can at any moment use facing page, and it's going to work properly as well. So you can also use facing page. It's definitely possible, and you can work with this also with a MasterPage. It's definitely not a problem. You can also edit a master, and you can just work with a MasterPage and using Facing page. I'm going to come back single page. Now, before to continue and to see why it is useful to use a master page, the first thing that I'm going to do, I'm going to page here. And on page, if you want to remove the Master page to come back to normal, you can apply Master page. And to all pages, you can define normals. And in this case, you will come back with a normal MasterPage without anything. First, I'm going to go on page, I will select, delete, and I will delete all the pages, expect the first one. Just like this, we'll come back here, but we'll keep the two Master page because after I'm going to show you why it is useful. 49. Work with masters part 2: We are going to continue with the masters. And for this, something that we can do it is to add pages. We are going to see how we can add pages and why it is useful to add a master page. First, when you go on page here, you can insert pages, and I'm just going to insert pages with different pages. So Congratully, I will insert a number. And I will increase the number to maybe I will insert 21 pages with a Master page normals first and I will just validate. So now I have a totals of, as you can see, 22 pages. So we have a total of 22 pages. Maybe I'm going to add more. I will add maybe I will add four pages more, and at the end is normal. So now I have totals of 26 pages. When you add a Masters, you can also apply on Even and odd pages. For example, when I go on page here, I can click on Apply Master page and I can select the Master one on Even pages. And you can even apply within a range. But if it's all the document, you can just apply this. And if I just validate, as you can see, I have my Master page one on even pages. And I can go on page here, I can insert, and I can insert maybe not insert a go on page, and I will just apply your Master page on hot pages, and I will use a Master number to invalidate, just like that. So you can apply Master like this. Now why it is useful. You can also invert. So for example, I can apply MasterPage you can also invert or we can replace we can use more different type of options if we need. Or I can come back Master page number one on odd pages like this, and I can apply page, apply Master Page, and Master number two on um, Ot pages, just like this. Oops, Applymaster page, Master two on even pages, and apply MasterPage Master one on hot pages, just like this. Yeah. Why it is useful Because now if I edit my Master Number one, for example, the Master number one, I decide to maybe add text, so I will add text. We'll add some text just here. In the text features, I will go on the right. First, I will double click. I will tape Title content one. And I will select my text. First, I will go here. I will select my text. I will go in the center. I will go you don't need to see if the text is going to work properly, and I will go in the middle here. I will increase the size. I will increase the size like 46, and at the same time, I will go in the property panels, and in the property panels, I will crack a rectangle like this. And I will also adjust inside my text and inside my text in the text properties. We will um adjust the color of the text, and we will use the is color, colors, and I will define wise. Now I will click on this frame. I will go right click and I will copy, and we will go on the Master too and we will go right click and we will click on past here. Then I will move, I will snap just below my image, and I will replace my title number on 102, and at the same time, I will select my rectangles. And in the property panel, we will adjust with maybe red, just like that or magenta. Oh, as you can see, I make modification on my master. And if you just return here, as you can see, you have the modification. So this is why it's extremely useful. If you have modification on 100 pages, you need to edit 100 pages. You can just edit one and it's going to be totally enough. And after that, I can it it in content, so it means I can come back to my master one. And if for example, I want to maybe change the color here, I can change the color. If I want to go in the text properties and I decide to adjust the size of the text, I can change as well. So for example, we can adjust the size of the text. I will reduce to 30, and if I just return here, as you can see, we have the adjustment. So this is why it is extremely useful. When you have this different master here, when you just double click here, you can enter your Master page. A Master, you can duplicate a master as well. Example, you can click here and you can duplicate to master and I can define maybe Master number three, or I can select this one and I can also duplicate a master, and I can duplicate for Master number four. You can duplicate different masters on this area using this one and you can also delete masters as well. If you delete a master, for example, I will remove this one. You need to be careful because you have some content, so I'm going to click on es here. And you need to be careful because you have some content. So what will happen? First, if I just come back to here, as you can see, this is why it is useful to apply the masters. You can also dragging and moving the master normals. And in this case, you can just replace any master by the first master, it means the basic master, and by default, still you need to have at least one master. This is a normal master by default. As I explained, you can also apply master page and you can also apply, for example, the master normals to the page that you want. So you can come back, it's not a problem and you can keep your master here. Something that you can do as well, it is when you go in this area, you can also delete the masters. And to do this type of work, I can come back here. So this one is my normal master. This one is the Master one and this one is the Master two. So the Master one, I will, for example, click on this ara. And I will delete the selected masters. And this master page is used at least once in the document. So we ask yourself because you have some masters in some pages. And if you are okay, you can click and validate to. Or this one it is same, I can delete. And if I just delete, I will click on to. So now what will happen? If you delete masters and you add, for example, masters on pages, automatically, the pages will come back with your original masters. So it means the normal masters. So concretely, if I just click here, I will select return to normal page mode just on this area. And as you can see, now all my pages have just thermal masters, as you can see. So this is how you can craft masters, why it is useful to add masters and definitely something extremely powerful when you work in this type of software and you want to manage pages. Manage pages, manage Masters. I will go on page here. I will find delete, we delete to different pages. So it means I will save the page number two. So thanks to that, we can see one more time also how to manage pages because generally you manage masters and you manage pages at the same time and we need to work with two. I will delete 2-26, and I will come back to my first page. And this is how we can work with masters. 50. Add symbols part 1: We're going to see how to insert page number. For this to insert page number, I have this document here and the first things to do, we will work with a master. If you want to create a page number, you will have to work on a master. Plus I have this master here and something that we will do it is to create a new one. I will double click here and I will create a new MasterPage. After that, we have a name. We can change the name of this master page. We'll just change for master example, and I will just validate. In this master page, what we will do, will select directly image frame. I will use page, I will snap to guide, and we will create a image on the top image frame. I will adjust on the different position of my frame and right click. We will get the image. What image I will use, I will use the image with the model. So it means this one, double click, and we'll play the image inside. Then we'll go on the image properties to activate two frame size, and we can come back to freescalin increase the size of the image. And after to increase the size, I will double click and I will dragging and moving little bit image to move just like that. Maybe we can increase a little bit more the size. So after to do this work, I will just validate. So we'll create a master page with this one. After that, I will return to normal page mode here, and I will apply the master page directly on my first image. And we will add Oder page. I will go on page here, insert, and I will insert, for example, we'll insert maybe ten page at the end, and I will apply the Master Page Master example. But after that, we can add any content on our different page. For example, I will use a default shapes. I will go on page, snap two items, and maybe I will create a rectangles here, just add little bit content on the different pages. I will select the text tools, and I will create a frame text around this area. I will go right click sample text. I will define the language, I will define a paragraph with eight, and I will put my text here. On the right we justify the text. And after to justify the text, I will just put the text with a black color, and we will snap the text just here, and I will extend a little bit around this arrow or maybe we can let a little bit more space on the top. After that, something that I will do it is to select the rectangle, shift, select the text, and we will go on edit, and we will just or item I will duplicate or Control D, and we will place also on the second page, and I will press Control D, I will place on the third page, just like that, and I will place Control D, and I will place on the fourth page, and I could continue with filing. And you can just change the content if you need here. Know how to add a page number. To add a page number, extremely important, you need to work on a master. So for example, I will go on this master Master example, and I will add my number page. To add a number page, you select the text frame. You create a text frame like this. This text frame inside, you need to insert a symbol. How to insert a symbol. When you go right click, you can have different type of options, and here you are not going to find directly what you need. And for this, you need to bun the top Insert. And here when you continue little bit, you have character, and you can see page number. So you double click first. Double click. After Double click, you go on the insert options. And now, as you can see, you can insert character. And it's going to work exactly the same way for all the elements that you can use. I'm going to show you with a page number, and after I will show you with a number of pages. We define a page number just here, page number. And as you can see, just a number is going to be displayed. So it's not extremely important. You can just keep the number that give you like this. And after you define the position of your frame, where you want to find the page number, for example, I want the page number on the bottom right corner. Just like that, I can place my element here, I can adjust a little bit the size of my frame. And if I just click here, something that I can do it is to increase the size. I can increase the size. Maybe I will put the page number with 26 in the center and in the column and te distance in the midle as well. So now what I will do if I get out, my page number will be displayed on the pages where I apply my master. So if I just come back here, you can see the page number is going to display here. And on all the pages, as you can see, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten. If I want to adjust the size because it's too big, I double click here, I can adjust the frame, I can reduce the size of the frame, for example, and I will decrease the size of the page number like 16, and now if I get out, return to normal page, as you can see, we have our number of pages perfectly, just like that. And here we have 11, ten, nine. You can also deactivate the preview like this. If, for example, I add more image, I'm going to click on Page Insert, and I will insert maybe 11 after the page with the master example. And as you can see, we have all the number of pages. If you work, for example, with a double page, you can switch for facing page, and you can start if I start, even if I start with a left page, how to process. As you can see, you just need to work with, for example, another master. So how to process, you will come back to this master example. And on this area, you can create a new master, so you can create a new master. Duplicate this master. You can, for example, duplicate this master. I will duplicate this one, and I will double click. I will duplicate with master example two, and this one I will rename for master example one. And in the master example one, I will put, for example, the text on the right here. And for the master two, I will put on the left. So I will dragging and moving, and I will put on the left, just like that. So now what I will do if I return here. I will apply I will go on page, and I will apply MasterPage. I will apply my Master example one on all the even pages, even pages, master one, just like that. And I will go on page, I will apply MasterPage and I will apply the Master example two on odd page just like that. And thanks to that, as you can see, we can have the page number on the left and on the right like this. And for this, you need to crap two master. And if I just continue, you can see the number of page will be perfectly display. And the same if you want to adjust, you can double click, and you select the Master one. If for example, it's too big, I can reduce like this. I can select the master example two. As well. And if I want to change the size, I can click here, but you can also change the color or any type of properties here. And if I just return here, as you can see, you can display the different pages. If I just go here at any moment, I can come back to just one page, single page. And in this case, we have display on the left and on the right because we have two masters. 51. Add symbols part 2: We're going to see how to create a number of pages. For this something that we are going to do to create a number of pages, we will go on this document here and to add this type of element, you need to work with a master page. So first, I will create a Master page with an element on the top. I will define Master page, I will double click here, and I will create a new MasterPage. I will rename this Master page. I will go for Master example. And I will validate. I will just create image on the top. We will select the image frame, and I will create the image frame on the top. I will zoom a little bit on the page options. We activate SnapTGuide and I will put this on the left and I will adjust on each side my image frame. We'll put the image inside for this, we will click here, image frame. No image frame will come back with the selection tool. I will click on this one and right click Get image. We'll select the image with the models. This one, double click, and I will go on the right image properties. The image property will activate two frame size and we will activate the free scaling value to increase the percentage. So I will increase the percentage until around here and double click to adjust little bit the position of the image inside. After to do this, this type of, this will be my base. Then we will come back on return page here. And I will dragging and moving the master example on this first page, and we will add more page. I will go on page. I will apply Master page. I will add image. So we'll go on page, insert and we'll insert more pages. How much pages I will insert? I will insert, for example, 25 pages. And if I insert 25 pages, I will define the master page, master example, I will validate. And now we have a total of 26 pages. As you can see on this area, we have 26 pages. So after to do this type of work, I will put just a little bit content one more time. We can repeat the same type of thing. I will create maybe a rectangle, small rectangle here. I will change the color in the properties options. Let's click on colors, and I will define the black color just like that. After that, I will select the text tools. We craft a text frame around this area, and I will double click and then right click to apply a simple text, and we will define just maybe four paragraph with this language, and I will just validate inside. I'll select the text frame. I will go on the text property will keep a value of 12 point and we'll adjust with ing text justified. And I will extend a little bit my frame text on the left, and we can put in the center like this. I need to go on page, snap two item, and thanks to that, we can center here and dragging and moving a little bit. I think I will reduce also these rectangles. Let's reduce and put like this and put this one just here. Then I will duplicate two times with Control D. I will duplicate these two element with Control D, and I will play these two element just like that. And I will use Control D with this one dragging and moving here. I will select the four element, go little bit on the top. These two element, little bit on the top, and this one just here, and I will extend a little bit. So to insert page number, first, I will select all this element, and I will go right click or I will just duplicate. In this case, it's going to be okay, and I will duplicate and I will place here. And yeah, I think it's pretty better to create to group. So I will go right click here and I will cry to group with all this element, and I will select all this and cry to group. So thanks to that, we can change little bits of position and, for example, snap to the top like this. And here I can snap to the top as well here. I will go on page. Yes, I have snapping options, and yes, just place this one around here. And I will just dragging and moving little bit here and this one dragging and moving hoops, dragging and moving little bit here. So it's notice tell me pot on the content at this moment. I just want to show you how you can add a page number. So to add a page number, you need to go in your master. So you go in the master first, I go in the Master example, I create a text frame will set the text frame tools and you can craft a text frame. And when you double click inside, you have the possibility to go on Insert and in Insert, what you will be able to find will be able to find character and number of page. So you click here, and as you can see, we have the number 26 corresponding to the total of number of page that we have on this document. Then you can click here. You can adjust like the center, you can use any type of options that we have on the right to change. I will select Mid also. You can change the color if you want. You can change the size. Let's put, for example, 16, and I will drag in moving on the bottom right corner, for example, and I will adjust little bit to size just like this. So now if I just get out, return to normal page mode, you can see our page number. So we have 26 appearing here. You can click on the preview option and we have the number of page. But here just the number of page. So if you want to complete the number of page with a page number, it's also possible. You need to create a second frame. I will click here and come back to the master example. It's the master example, I will complete. So what we will do we create another frame. We will go with the text frame tool. We'll create another one. This one we will snap to the right just like this. Here. Maybe this one we can scale a little bit on this direction and put this one just here. Just need to adjust to be on the bottom hoops. It's not extremely convenient here to perfectly align, yes, just like that. And I will align this one just like this. And if I select the 21, yes now we can go on this area. And this one I can, yes, address perfect. So now on this one, I will double click and I will go on page. I will go on Insert and we will select character and what we will apply in the character features, will create a number of page. So here I can insert a page number will insert to page number. I will click on this area and the page number will be display. One more time I will switch to have the right alignment center, we will click on the vertical alignment mider. And after to do this work, I can also adjust the size. Maybe I will put 16. And as you can see, if you just come back to the page, you can display like this. Now you can add you can add any symbol if you need. So you can add any symbol to complete. So how you can complete, you come back to your master. And for example, just beside here, I can letter space, and I can add, for example, coma like this. I can also, if I prefer, I can reduce ittlebt the size here. This one I can reduce little bit the size and place around here, just like that. And as you can see, you can adjust like this, but you can reduce little bit more this one as well, just like that. And I can do something here. Now, if I get out, I will come back to the page. As you can see, you can display like this 1226 or two to 26 to 26, and you can just scroll below as you can see. And if you want to reduce little, it's still possible. You just come back to one more time you master, and you can also adjust more this frame. So you can adjust more this frame and put this one more closer, just like that. And this one you can reduce again a little bit more and put this one a little bit more closer and do something like this. Now, if I get out, I will come back here. Return to normal page mode. And as you can see if I click on the display, you can work like that 226, three to 26, but you need to be careful because when you will have two number, you will have something like this. As you can see, it's not extremely convenient here. I need to come back to my master example, and on my master example, I need to extend a little bit to have a little bit more space, just like that. And I will need to extend a little bit when I return and I have two number, it's going to work. Here. So this is the type of things that we can do if you want to add also a number of pages with a page number. 52. Card part 1: If in this training, we're going to create a card, and it will be interesting training to see different features. For this, I created a new document 135 millimeters wide, 135 millimeter wide, and for the 860 5 millimeters. So for the eight, 65 millimeter, you can take a look on the rulers here and on the rulers here. We create the front of the card and then we'll create the back of the card as well. The first thing that I'm going to do here is to create image frame on the backgrounds. And we will click on the image frame will go around this area, and first, I will go on the page options to snap two guides and in the page to snap two items. At the same time, I will zoom and I will place my image frame, snapping the different borders of my page. And something that we will do it is to go right click and to get the image. What image will select with image with a table, it means this one and double click to insert the image. Then we will scale the image. I will go on the right, as I explained before, image properties, two frame size, then free scaling, and we can increase in percentage value, the size. When I arrive around 40, I can double click and I can adjust little bits of position like turn, something like this. And I will just validate. After that, I will come back to this property panels, and we will create a rectangle on the front. I will create a rectangle like this. I will scale little bit this rectangle on this area, and I will place in the center. We can, by the way, open a panel because we will use these panels, but we directly open in the window panels, ailing and distribute panels and we'll put this directly on the right here. For the color on these rectangles, we will define colors and what we can use, we can use the wise color. After that, we will decrease a little bit of transparency of the colors here you have the value or you can have the value here, shared value, and I will decrease to upturn value of something like 80%, just like that. Here we have a stroke fill. Oops. None. I will go on the Ys. Here, this one is not working properly. I'm going to adjust with a transparency value. It's not on the shed, it is the transparency value. And yes, now it's going to work. I will adjust with 80%. Now something I will do, I will add content on the front, and I will select the text tool. I will go left click here. We will extend this text frame, and directly what we can tap we can tap nature G done. So we'll sec natural gardens. We will adjust little bits of frame around something like this. And something like this, and I will go on the text properties options. So on the text properties option, first, I will change the font family. I have different type of font family, and I will adjust I have andara, and I will use Kandara bolt. Yes, I will use Kandara bolt. And I will increase the size. Just like this, we will put a value like around. I think 30 can be pretty good. Maybe we can increase a little bit more like 36. And I will put in the center here, and in the color and take distance, we activate my dolls, and I will hoops dragging and moving little bit element inside. The problem is, I would like to have a specific color. So one of the problem if I just get in the property panel, I don't have the green color that I want, so I need to create a color. But to create a color, I will go on the top left corner. And as I explained, we can go on colors here, and I will use colors and feel. And will create a new one. I will click on ad. I will select something in green. So I will adjust with some green color, little bit darker, maybe like this one. I think it will be pretty good. And this type of green color. And I will click and validate here. I have my new color appearing here, and I can double click to change. I will make green dark and I will validate. Now I created green dark and I will click on Okay, and I will activate the green dark to this one. But here it is, as you can see on the frame, I don't want to have this on the frame. I want to have this on the text, so we'll select the text properties, color and effect, and we will select green dark. Then we will duplicate, edit, duplicate, or you can press Control D as well. It's going to be faster Control D, and we are going to double click and tape conceptions. Then we can adjust little bits of text frame on the vertical way just like this here, and I can put natural garden and conception, maybe this one here and maybe this one here. I will duplicate conception with Control D, we duplicate, and the text inside will reduce the text inside. I will reduce, I will reduce, and I will reduce until maybe 12, and I will double click to change the content and I will tape garden Mans by Pfau nights, just like this. And I will adjust the text frame on these directions, and we can do something like this. Maybe we can go here, reduce a little bit more. This one. Oops, I'm not going to see my text, yet, just like that. And maybe this one can reduce a little bit, and I will obtain this render. No I have little space on the top. So on the top, we are going to create something like a symbol with a circle and a tree inside. How to process, you can use the default shape circles. You go on the top area here, you can press Control to display a small circles. And these circles in the property panels, and in the color panels, we will re parate the same green dark color. We'll put the circle here, and inside, we will create another element. I will go on the top. I will create rectangles. We'll create a small rectangles just like this. Here. After to create this small rectangle, I will change for the wise color. I will go in colors, and I will define is. We create also a circle. I will use anoer circles, and create an order circle here. I will define the wise color. I will place ones around maybe this area, and I will press Control D to duplicate. I will place anoer one here. And I will press Control D, and I will place another one maybe like this. As you can see here with Snap, but I think this will be pretty good. I can extend it be this one. And something that I will do, I will select inside this different element. And for this, I will select I will click outside first. I will see this first circle, the second one. The third one. Oops. Yes. The third one and the rectangle to generate a group. So I will go right click, group or Control G. Then I will select also the circle and this group to go on the Allen and distribute panel center and center. And then we can generate a group with all this element. Right click generate a group again. And thanks to that, if I want to scale little bit my groups, keeping the proportion, I can pre shift control, and as you can see, I can scale. And we will place our small symbol on the top, just like that. I just need to check that everything is in the center. So how we can process, we can click on this element, this group, and relative to the page, we can check Center. I can click on Net Garden center, Conception Center, Garden NorsbergProfessional Center. And we can activate the preview to take a look about what we have and I think like this, it's pretty convenient. The problem is think it's not perfect in the center. Let's just click on Natural Garden. Yes, because natural garden in the text properties, I forgot to put here in. We're not in the center. It's a little strange. Perception we are. And if I select this one, yes, we are not in the center here. It's a little strange. And So this text is not pretty good. I will press control the here. It's a little strange. So for this reason, I will prefer to duplicate this one and I will tap again because it's a little strange in this way. And yes, now it's going to work and I can adjust this one and I can snap here. And now I think it's going to be better. Can also dice your garden on these directions, and we can obtain this render. So it's okay for the front of the card. 53. Card part 2: We're going to continue with this training. We have seen how to create this card, and we have seen to create this card, how to crat the front, and we're going to create the back. So what we will do to create the back, first, I will go on page and I will select insert, and at the end, I will insert a page with the same dimensions. And we will just validate to have this second page here. On this second page, we crack rectangles on the background. I will use the default shapes and I will generate rectangles here. This rectangle, I will place, yes. On this area, we will snap and I will define the green color that we use for this text. We'll go on the right, I will go into color features, and in the color features, we will activate this green color. Then we'll insert image. I will click on the image frame tools and I will create image around this area will reduce a little bit the size of the image, and I will place here. Maybe we can extend where in the midle will reduce a little bit, and I will insert image inside. Right click will get image, and in the Get Image tools, what we will use in the G Image tools, we will use a garden image and double click will place here. While more times I will go on the right and on the right, we have the image properties. In the image properties, I will work with first frame size, and I will define free scaling. And in the free scaling, I will increase the albedo size and double click, and we can adjust what we want inside. So after I will check, yes, the vertical iga. I will continue with some content, and I will select the text frame tool will go around this area, and we will double click to tape Contact. We'll tact us, and I will just click on the frame text. We change the phone family. We will use the same font family that we used before, and I will select Candaa. After that, we can adjust on this area the number of point here, and we will select something like 24, and I will use Alen tech center. Not Alentex center, we'll stay on the left. In this case, staying on the left will be pretty better, as you can see. And if we continue, we use colon and takes distance, but the vertical igment will use dolls. And I will adjust a little bit my frame just like this. I will change the color also for is and maybe you can increase a little bit the size 26 and I will place contact us around here. Then we duplicate, we press Control D, I will duplicate. I will reduce the size of the content inside like 14, I will also scale the size on the directions. I will reduce as well until 12 and I will tape address street mimosa any content. I will then duplicate. We'll click on the textFrames. I will press Control D and I will go here, we will tap fun like this. Then we will click outside, we select this and Control D again, and I will replace the content, I will tape then we will duplicate again. I will press Control D, and I will duplicate until here, and we will replace the content by so it's okay for that. Now I will just in the different elements. So first, I will move little bit garden design here, this one around here, and this one around here. I will select these four element of text on this area. And after to select this four elements of text, I think it's little B. I don't like too much. We are in 14, we reduce to 12, and here I will reduce to 12. Here, I will reduce it too big, I will reduce to 12 as well, this one I will reduce to 12, just like this. And contact, maybe we can increase to 30. But if I increase to 30, I will extend a little bit on this direction and little bit the directions. Let's take a look. Yeah. Or maybe here we can reduce to 11. Yes, I will reduce to 11, this 111, and this 111, let's take a look and contact us will reduce to I think 26 is convenient. Yes, let's just work like this. I will select this four element of text on this area, as you can see, and I will go into Ailing and distribute panels relative to, for example, the first selected. We will define directly the left alignment, left and distribution, we will use this one. Distribute center accidentally vertically. Now we'll click on contact us. I will adjust little bit of position here, and I will just check with all the element, alignment left, just like this. I think it's okay for that. We can select all this element and generate a group with all the text, right click, generate groups, right click, create two groups, and thanks to that, we can adjust little bit the position of the group if we need, and I will position just like that. So after to do this work we will click here and that's it. We have created the front of the card, so it means this one, and we have created the back of the card, so it means this one. 54. Post part 1: In this training, we are going to create a post, and for this, I created a new document, and in millimeter, 280 millimeter wide, and 240 millimeter eight, 280 millimeter wide and 240 millimeter eight. At the same time, what we will do concretely, we will focus with disposition. We will separate in different part. We will add four images. After that, we will add a rectangle and also content inside this rectangle. So the first thing that I'm going to do is to create different separation to place my different images. And for this, I will go on the page here, and I will define manage guide. After to do this type of work, I will define here colons rows, and we will define one colons horizontal and one vertical. After to do this work, I will define use gap, and thanks to that, I can add a gap horizontally and vertically, and we can define a value. The value of the gap will be ten millimeter, so I can apply ten millimeter here and I can apply ten millimeter as well on this area. I will apply to all pages, but I only have one page in this case, and I will validate. Now I have my position for my four images. I will go on the page here. We will activate also Snap to guides, and at the same time, we can apply Snap to item as well. Now what we will do we will apply our different images on the area. For this, I can select the image frame tools and I will go left click to create image frame. This image frame because I'm using the snapping option, I can snap to the edge of my border first, and then we can snap to the guide in this area and to the guide in this area as well. Now I will replace the image inside and to replace the image inside, I will go right click, I will get image, and I have four images with temple, Temple one, two, three, and four. We use these four images. I will select the temple number one, double click, I will put the image inside and first, I will go on the right image properties and we will use two frame size re scaling and I will increase with the scale value. After to increase like this, I can double click and I can dragging and moving to select a specific areas that I want for my image. Maybe we can increase a little bit more again like this one, and I can define maybe this area, just like that. If I'm satisfied, I will just validate. I will click outside and I will validate. And now the aim is to repeat the process four times. Oh, I will select this image one more time, and I will duplicate. I will press Control D, and I will duplicate little bit on the right, and I just need to snap. I will replace the image with right click Get Image, and I will selex the image temple number two. I will validate. Let's go on the right image properties, two frame size, three scaling, increase the size until two B to cover perfectly the image frame. And when I'm satisfied, I double click here and I can just take the part that I want on the image. And in this case, we will tap this part, for example. Let's repeat the process. I will click on this image, and I will press Control D to duplicate, and I will snap on this area, then we'll go on the right. To frame size hoops. If I to use this one, I will replace by another one. So let's just come back, right click, get image, and we will take the image temple number three. Now, to frame size, freescaling, and I will increase with scale value. And I will define maybe 36 double click and we adjust little bit this area. And I will repeat last time. I will select this time this image, and I will duplicate with Control D. We will go on the right. We can perfectly snap here, and I will go on the right click here, image, and we have the temple number four and double click temple number four. Now what I will do, I will just use two frame size, pre scaling. Let's increase the size until to cover perfectly the image frame. And when I'm satisfied, now I can just dragging and moving a little bit, and we will select this area. Then we will just click outside, as you can see. So after to do this type of work. After to do this type of work, what we can do. We will just remove our different guide. We just check that our images are perfectly snapping on each corner. I think in this case, it's okay. So now if I can keep the guide, but I think I don't need anymore at this moment, so I will go on the options here, and we will define first page, manage guide, and we'll go on this area, delete guide from the current page, just like this. And now we have the right structure. It's important every time when you want to have the right alignment, distribution, right space to ask yourself what is the best is the best to right colon is the best to use to align and distribute panels. It's important to understand that. So it's okay with this first part. 55. Post part 2: We're going to continue with this training. So for this, we have seen how to play these different images in different image frame with a structure to have the same space between each image frame. Now what we will do we will add content. And for this, I will create rectangles, default shapes, rectangles, and we'll create rectangles around this area first. I can open my limen panels at the moment. We can go on Windows, we can select alien distribute. And first, I need to create a color because I want to have orange color. When I go on color, as you can see, I don't have any orange. This is the reason for which I will go here, edit, and we will use colors and fills and we'll create a new one. For this I will click on ad. I will search orange color on this area like maybe this one, this orange color, I will just validate and I will click on ad just here. I need to rename also. I will rename, I will tape orange. I will get out and now I can activate my orange color and on the stroke, none. I think we can adjust a little bit of size around this area just like this. Something that I will do also, is to put this in the center. Hinge and distribute relative to the page, center and center. Here you have the different option and inhaling center and center. I would like to add a stroke with the same wise that the gutter that we have. How to process will come back to the property panels. Stroke, we will activate now wise, we'll go in the line features, and we will define airlines. I need to put ten millimeter as well, just like this. Now we will add some content. I will use the text tools, and with the text tools, we'll create a frame text around this area. And inside this frame text, I will double click and I will tape travel Japan. After that, we will click outside, we select the frame text again, we will go into text properties, and I will start to increase the text until 30 to start center. I will go in the column and distance vertical alignment, Mdels and then we can adjust the font family. So here I have multiple font family, and I will change for another one. And what we reduce will reduce the font family calibre. And I will switch regular for bolt just like this. And after that, I will increase more the size. So here we can increase more. We will define value like I think 60 is too much. We'll define 48, and I will put travel Japan here. I just need to change the color, color, and effect, and we will switch for is. After that, I will adjust I will duplicate my text with Control D. We will reduce the size and I will put the size of maybe 30 and I will double click and I will tape the temples like this. Then we will adjust. I will zoom little out. We'll put this frame text, we can scale on these directions, and we can put a little bit more on the top. I will activate the preview, take a look about the disposition. I think it's pretty good. Maybe we can put this one little bit more on the top and this one little bit more on the top as well. Just like that. And now we have some space just below to create different stars. I will set for that to star tools. We can click here properties. And to create the stars, I need to switch the corner for five and to apply a factor. So thanks to that, we can create the stars and we can adjust the apply factors value. I think around -40% can be pretty convenient. I will validate and I will create the stars just below. I will start my starts around this size. No big stars, maybe around this size, and I will go in the property panels. I will select stroke no pill wise, and I will duplicate with Control D. We duplicate the first time on the left, Control D second time on the left again, and I will select this one, Control D on the right, and Control D on the right again, just like this. I will select these five stars. I will go on the right here and in the adding and distribute panels relative to maybe the first selected, I will activate center on horizontal axis. And after that, we'll select the distribution panels. Distribute center equenaly horizontal. We can then generate a group, so rightly create a group to be able to center the group on the page, and we can come back to alignment relative to page center. Now if I zoom little out, we can check with a preview. I think like this, it's pretty convenient. We can just change eventually the position of the different element. So for example, I can see travel Japan, maybe we can move a little bit more on the top again. Maybe this one we can move a little bit more on the top again. I think the position of the stars can be pretty convenient. We can check that everything is in the center. This is how to process. You can open your annals. You select Travel Japan and you check Center. You select Discover temples and you check Center. You select this group of stars, you check center. You click also on the range rectangle, and relative to the page, you check center on vertical axis and center on horizontal axis as well, just like that. And that's it. We're finished for the creation of this post. If I activate the preview, we can obtain this render. As you can see, it's important to work right with the alignment panel, the distribution, panels, and also the position of the different elements who have the right structure. 56. Flyer part 1: O. In this training, we're going to create a flyer and for this, I created a new document A for document, and we will create these flyers and we will see many different features in this training. F things to do we create a rectangle on the backgrounds. For this, I will select the rectangle tool, we activate first in the page Snap two guides and we can apply Snap two items, and I will generate my first rectangle with Snap on each border of the page. And after that, we will be able to change the color. I will go on the right here and on the right in the color features will apply the black color. After to do this work, I would like to create something like a symbol on the top. For this, I would like to create something like a fork and a spoon and generate this type of symbol. I will use a default shapes, the rectangles with create rectangles around here we adjust little bit position like that. And these rectangles, what we will do, first we will go on the stroke value, and stroke will activate wie on the field value will activate black, and on the line wide, we will apply a value of 2 millimeters. I will add little bit rounded corners. I can go in the shape options, and in the shape option, we can put little bit like a value of 2 millimeters. After that, I will create another rectangles on the top, so we'll create another one, little bit smaller. This rectangle will do the same type of thing. We'll go on color, feel black, stroke, we apply wise in the line value, we define also two millimeter. And we can scale little bit on these directions, and we can play this one around this area. Again just dragging and moving to snap like this in the midle. Then we will create oder shape. First, I will reduce a little bit on these directions, and I will create circles. Let's create the circles. You can press Control to create perfect circles, and then you will create rectangles and a second rectangle arriving in the midle to generate a Bolan erron. You can change the color of this circle, for example, in the field options, green, stroke, no. So now what we will do we generate Bolan operation. I will select the rectangle and the circles. And as I explained before, when you go in items, you can find here pass tools and you have combined polygons, and you have here pass operation. Let's select pass operation, and I will define substract and we can just invert the shape so we can swap shapes upturn half circle just like this. And now this half circle I can place around this area. I will adjust little bits of color, so feel black, stroke, wise. Line size to millimeter as well, and that's it. We can center our element. Then I will select the line tools. So for this, we can use the line tools here, and I will be able to generate a line on this area with press shift, and this line I will adjust with the line to millimeter also. And I will check the colors peel no stroke wise, and I will move a little bit my line on the edge like this. I will duplicate. We press Control D, I will place also on the right like that, but you need to zoom to move a little bit more and Control D again. I will place here and Control D again. I will place here. Now we can open the panels. Aline and distribute panel. In the Allen and distribute panels, we can select these four rectangles. And when I go in the haline and distribute panels, I will define relative to the first selected, and I will arrive top here, and we will use the distribute value. And in the distribute value distribute center occidentally horizontal, just like that. As you can see, we have a first icon. Then we'll crad the spoon. To crad the spoon, I will select this element. I will press Control D, and I will dragging and moving little bit on the right. I will select this one, Control D as well, and I will move also a little bit on the right, just like that. You need to check that are perfectly in the center here, and we'll create another circle. I will select the circles, the circle tools to create ellips and we can make something like this we can put in the center. And you can align on the top on this a with this one. We have this one and we can scale just like this. I think, yes I need to adjust on this array strength because we don't find the top here. I think like this it's pretty good. If I want to be sure, I can move, yes, now it's okay. And I will Adjust, so I will go on the right. We will use the property panels, and the property panel will select stroke wise, feel no, and in the line value, we will define a line wise of 2 millimeters. And then we can put this around this rea just like that. I can fill with a black color as well, so I will click here. And in the property panels, we will also fill with a black color. Now we can cry to group with all this element, right click group, then create to group with all this element, right click group, then create complete groups with these two groups, right click groups, and we can just scale a little bit around this area, and I will place my element around here on the top. We can reduce a little bit and place element, yes, just like that. Now we will add some text. So I will come back here and we'll select the text tools, and with a text tool, we crack a text frame just below around this size, and we will double click to tape content. We will seal the kitchen. After to tape silver kitchen, I will select my text frame, and I will go in the options of the text with the text properties. In the text properties, first we will change the color color for the white color like this. Then we'll center on the horizontal axis and center on the vertical axis with column, and we'll apply medals. We can increase the size of the text, and after to increase the size of the text, something that I will do, I will put a value like 48, and I will just change the font. And to change the font family, what we will use, we will scroll down, we select the font family to the letter, and we will select MV boll just like this. C adjust a little bit here. It's too small, we can increase little bit more the size until maybe 60. I think it's pretty good. I will adjust a little bit the size on this direction. Oops, not too much, and I will place the text around here, just like that. Maybe just a little bit more on the top. We can check the alignment aligned center, and we can duplicate with press Control D. After to press Control D, we'll just place the element just below. And in the text property will reduce the size of the text. I will reduce maybe 30 to 28 first, and I will tap something this new level of test. Maybe we can increase just more. I will select my text frame. I will extend a little bit on the left, extend a little bit on the right, and increase the size of the te, not too much. Let's put 30. Change little bit the size on these directions, and then move the text frame around this area. So I will check that everything is okay. We'll come back to my properties panel. So we have created our symbols. We have created our titles, and we have created our subtitles. And now it's okay for that. We'll continue after with more element. We'll add images, we'll continue with text. We'll add other types of element to generate this player. 57. Flyer part 2: We're going to continue with this flyer. For this, something that we are going to do, we will zoom on this area. And we will select the image frame tools to insert we are going to insert different images. So I create image frame like around, I think this ratio, we need after to duplicate two times. I think this ratio can be pretty good, and I will go right click Get image. And I have three images with mill, mill number one, two, and three. So I will select mill number one first, and then I will go in the image properties, two frame size, freescale, and we can increase little bit the size and double click, we can adjust the position inside, like for example, this one. Then we will select the image frame. I will click on the image frame move a little bit on the left and Control D to duplicate the first time. I will press Control D to duplicate a third time. Now I will select this frame and I will go right click. Get image will replace with the Mal number two, double click, go on the right two frame size, rescaling, let's increase just a little bit and after I can move inside, just like that. I will select my last image frame, right click, Get Image. I will select Mal number three, and I will go on the right tworameRscaling, and we will put maybe this size. And double click to adjust little bits of position inside. So after to do this work, we'll select the sui image frame, and we will distribute haline and distribute. We'll select the distribution, and we will use this distribution, distribute center ecdntaly horizontally. I can generate a group, I will go right click, create a group, and we can play this group in the center, just like that. Now we'll create a small rectangles on the top of this group. I will create a small one just here and adjust the position on the right and on the left. I can Zoom increase just a little bit these rectangles. And in the property panels, we will use colors, and we will select wise, and for the stroke nod. Then we'll duplicate with Control D, and I will place an 01 here, like around this area, this one around here, and we'll select this first rectangle, the group of image, the second rectangles. Adding and distribute panels, adding to the page center, distribute. We will use this one, distribute center ekinant vertical, and I can create another complete group with all this element just like that. I have a complete groups, as you can see, and I can move my groups if I need. Now I will select this element of text, and we press Control D will place around this area, and we will address the content. First, I will go into text properties. We will reduce the size to maybe 24 and double click to edit the content. And I will tape Food Center shopping mall. Maybe it's a little bit bigger, I will decrease for 20. I will adjust the frontex on these directions, and we will stay in the center here. Now I will create different stars. I will select the star tools properties. We switch the corner for five, and we can activate apply factors to generate the stars. Now we'll adjust little bit these factors like -42, validate, and I will generate small stars around this area. I think it's too small, let's increase, like, for example, this size. Food Center shopping mall is too small, I will increase to 24, just like that. And then I will select the stars. On the property panels will activate stroke non Pell wise, and I will press Control D, and I will move on the left. Then I will press Control D, and I will move on the left. Control D this time on the right, and Control D this time on the right. So we'll create five stars just like this. We can place around this one here, this one around here, and we can select all the stars. To work with the align and distribute panels again. Alignment we can use relative to the first selected, for example, top to check, and in the distribution panels, distribute center ecdntaly horizontally. And then generate a group directly, you can press Control G or groups, and I can center my groups just like that. Then we'll select Shopping Mall Food Center. I will press Control D, and I will duplicate just be low, just K after I will use in the text property, will decrease the size to 18 and double click IR type number. Like for example, this one, and I will just check the center. I can just little video size on these directions, and I will press Control D again, and I will duplicate just below, and on this area will double click also and we will tap WWW and we will use silver. Kitchen.com, like this. With the same size. It's okay for that. We can just adjust little bit the position of the different element. Maybe if I just scroll down, maybe this one we can put a little bit below. This one little bit below as well, this one little bit below. This I think the position is pretty good. Here we have our group. Maybe this one we can scroll down, but I think it's okay for that. Maybe you can reduce and move a little bit on the top, just like that. And I think I can move a little bit more on the top. Adjust again the size and move a little bit more on the top, just like that. Now, maybe it's too much. Yes. The last step is just to check that everything is in the center. So you open the alignment distribute panels. You select each element or each group, and you check in the alignment panels relative to the page. And every time you click on center, you click here center, you click here center, this one center, this one center, this one center, this one center, and this one center. It's okay, I can activate the preview, and we're finished with this player. So as you can see, we have seen many features mix the different features together to create this player. 58. Leaf part 1: In this training, we're going to create a leaflet and it will be interesting training to see different features. I created first new document and the size of this document in millimeter is 280 millimeter, 280 millimeter wide and 240 millimeter eight. 280 millimeter wide and 240 millimeter eight. After to do this type of work, the first thing that we're going to do is to go on this area. And on the page options here we go on manage guide. I would like to create a different columns and rows. And for this, I will use verticals and we'll focus with two rows, user gap, and I will put a little bit gap. And because of this leaflet, where if we want to bend the leaflet here, we have this small separation. We'll put only 2 millimeters and we can apply to all page just like this. After that, I will add image on the background. I would take the image frame, and I will create image just like this. And this image, I will adjust first on the page options. I will use Snap two guides, and I will use Snap two items. Thanks to that, I can put my image and snap to the border of my page. And after to snap to the border of my page, I will go right click and I will get image just like that. After to go right click and to use Get Image, I have su image on Iceland and I will sick the first one Iceland number one, and I will go on the right image property, image property two frame size free scaling, and we can increase a little bit the size. And after to be satisfied, I will double click and I will put this one around here. Then we will create rectangles. I will select the rectangle tool, differ shape rectangles, and we will create rectangles on this area. And I will snap direct this rectangle on the left here on the top, and also here. I would like to search a blue color. For this, I don't have directly these colors in my color options. It's not enough dark, so I will create a new one. I will go edit colors and fields will click on at here, and I will tape blue dark. And I will search a dark blue color like more something like this one, maybe we can adjust little bits of color, and I think this will be pretty good. I will just validate, click here, and I will activate this dark blue color, and I will change the transparency also. So just below, you can find transparency, and you can reduce the transparency and we'll reduce to 80%. So now I will add text, and I would like to create a new color for this text as well. So for this, we can go on dit options, colors and fields, and we will create another blue color. I will go on ad here. It is more blue green color. So maybe we can tap green green bright, for example, or blue bright. Maybe it's going to be a little bit more blue, so maybe we can apply blue bright. And after that, I will define a color. I will make something a little bit like this. We adjust little bits of color and make something I think you can put little bit color just like that, and it's not enough blue. I will move a little bit on the right, just like this. We'll try this one here. And after I will just validate this blue bright color and we can tap text. I receive a text to it here, and I will tap admire the scenic spots and incredible landscape. So I will tape this. I will click on my frame here, and we will let little bit space on the left and on the right as well. And now I will go on the text options. On the right first, I will click on the text properties. And on the text property will stay in the left and we'll change the font family. Font families that we can use many times, I'm going to reuse here will be the caliber font family. I will say calibre first. After I will adjust the color, and in the color we select the blue bright that we have created, and after I will increase little bit the size. And we will put a value like maybe 24, but as you can see, I don't have enough space between my lines. So I need to increase the line spacing to make something better, and we will put a line spacing like maybe 30 here. And I will put the element around here. I can adjust little bit my frame text. Now I will duplicate with Control D, and I will put another one on this area. And I will adjust the text. I think I need to check the color. I selected my blue bright. I think it's not enough blue. I will go and edit and I will see the color and feels. I will double click on this one. We'll make something a little bit darker, just like that, a little bit darker, and I will validate just like this. Here we replace the content. I will tape nor turn trips, just like this. We will scale. I will click here, I will dragging and moving, and I will scale the size of the text. And we will put 36 just like that. After that, I will duplicate again. I will press Control D, I will duplicate this element on the right. I will decrease little bits of size, will decrease little bits of size to line spacing as well, and I will switch the color for is. So I will tap some content with a white color. And after to do this work, I will adjust little bit this frame. We'll put norm trims around here. Here, we can move little bit, and maybe we can scale little the text for 18, and I think like this is convenient. I will take norm trips, I will press Control D, and I will put this on the right, just like that, I will switch the content. I I will replace the content by lting around just like this. We will switch the color for the white color, so I will define the white color. Maybe for the size, we can put 32. After that, after to crack this content, we have the white color. We can duplicate with Control D, and I will replace the content by Iceland. I will tap Iceland. Then we will increase the size scale a little bit here. And in this case, I will switch for center, and in this case, I will switch for center as well. So center and center. Iceland maybe we can reduce little bit to 48 and I will duplicate Iceland with Control D. I will scale little bit before to replace the content. I will tape country guides. We will scale, reduce the size. Oops. Let's click here. 26, and I can adjust little bit my different frames. And I think like this is convenient. I can take a look while kill a wrong Iceland. We can put Iceland little bit more on the top. Here it's too much maybe on this area, and I think it's pretty good. On this area can extend the space and we can put the space at maybe not the size of the t, the space can increase 26, I think. And it's okay for this first part. 59. Leaf part 2: We are going to continue with this training. So for this something that I'm going to do it is to create a new page. Can create a new page and to create the part so it means we have created the front, and now after to create the front, we can create the back. So first, we'll add a new page, page, will go on insert here and we'll insert one page after with exactly the same size. I'm going to Zoom little beta root, I will go on page, insert, and we'll insert one page. After that, we can zoom on this second page, and on this second page, we can double click. We can go also on page manage guide, and we can also apply on this one column rose and use a gap and also two millimeter apply to all pages. I will define also the same type of thing image on the back. We click on the image frame tools, and we will snap on each corner as well, here, here. On this area and on this area, and we will replace the image. So right click Get image. And I will select Iceland number two. Then we can go in the image properties, two frame size, pre scaling. I can increase the size, and after to increase the size, double click and we can dragging and moving little bit image around here. Just like that. I'm satisfied, I can just validate, I can click Outside hoops. I need to double click and put a little bit more on the top. After to do this type of work, we'll create rectangles. I will select the rectangle tools and we'll create rectangles around here like this. After these rectangles, I will go into property panels will define colors, and what color will define will define the blue dark colors. Then we will create rectangles on the right here and we'll snap to this part of the guide, not totally on the rectangle just here. And after that, I will define the blue dark. We'll change the transparency as well, so I can click here and I can change the transparency of these rectangles with 80 and this rectangle with 80 as well. Then we can add content. I will select, for example, this one, and I will press Control D, and I will duplicate on my second arrea just like that. Then we'll place the content here. I will double click and I will tape visit Iceland. After to do this type of work, I will adjust my text. I will go into text properties. We can increase the size of the text. We put, I think, 36, I think 36. Maybe it's not enough. I will put 40 and I will place my element here. We can extend a little bit rectangle and create another frame text just here. I will create a frame text just below, I will put on this area and this area. And inside, I will switch for the calibre font family. We will also switch the color first for the wise color. And then I will go left click. I will go right click and I will insert a simple text. And for this simple text, we'll just crate something like maybe two paragraph. I will define the language, I will validate and I can do something here, just like this. We can maybe adjust little bits of content and we do it to put this number off line, I will put a value of 12. And for the space, maybe we can put 16 and place this content just maybe here. I can take a look and I think like this, it's convenient. So after that, I will select Visit Iceland and I will press Control D, and I will duplicate around this area. Oh, we're going to adjust the text. I will take something like this. Let's reduce size, maybe enjoy a wide variety of attraction. Maybe we can adjust, I can put variety here of a track of attractions. And finally, I think I can come back like this. I will put variety just here and of attractions that made Iceland beautiful. Let's just stay like this. I will click on the content. I will change the size, I will put maybe I think we can put 18. And for the live spacing, we can reduce little to 26, and I will put my element around maybe here and we reduce the frame a little bit. So after that, I will click on visit Iceland. I will press Control D, and I will go on the right here. We will replace by destination. After to tape destination, we'll put more destination on the top like this, and we will duplicate as well. I will press Control D. I will stay in this alignment, then we reduce the size, and I will double click. I will tape something like Montens and I will reduce again the size of the content. Just like that. After to do this type of work, we can go on the left, we can take this frame text, and we can press Control D to duplicate and play this one around here. Maybe adjust little bit text with less content only four lines just like that. And I can select Monten and this one and we can duplicate. We can generate a group first. We can go right click groups. Then we can press Control D. And we can duplicate maybe here, maybe this one we can just scroll the group little below, here. This one may be around here, and I will press Control D again and this one around here. So now I have these three different groups, I can select the three groups. We can go in the window panels and you can open the Aline and distribute panels. I'll put my healing and distribute panels here, and in the distribution, we can click here, distribute center Equilen study vertical. And now I can group, I can go right click and group. This one, right click and group, and this one right click and group. And if I want to edit the content, here, we have mountains. Here we can change for maybe Volcan nose, I will replace by Volca nose and this one I will replace by maybe legs just like this. And it's okay for that. I will take a look and we can obtain this render. So now the last thing that I'm going to do is to just create rectangle where we can bend the leaflet. So for example, I will define a default shape rectangle on the first here and we'll create a small rectangle on this area. And we'll use the properties. And first in the properties, we need to recuperate the white color. So I will recuperate the white color, and I will place the white color around here. I will snap. I will snap here as well, and we can extend the rectangle until the back of the page, the bottom of the page, I will press Control D, and I will duplicate and play this one around here as well and we can snap. Then we can press Control D, and I will drag in and moving and play this one on the other page just like this. I will press Control D, and I will duplicate and play this one again on this area. Maybe I'm not, now I'm in the right position, I think. So it's okay for that. I will go in the page, I will select manage guide and in the columns and rose, can go here and delete the guide from QN page and all pages. And now I will click on this area. I will activate the preview mode, and it's okay for the creation of this leaflet. 60. Map site part 1: In this training, we are going to create a site map, and it will be interesting training to see different features. I created a new document 260 pixels, 260 pixels wide, and 220 pixels. Eight. So 260 pixels wide and 220 pixels eight. So something that we are going to do first, it is to create a rectangle on the backgrounds. So we'll create rectangles. And for this we will click on the page, Snap two Guide and page Snap two items. We'll create rectangles on the back, we will adjust on these directions, this direction, and this direction, and I would like orange color. If I go in the colors features, I don't have the orange color. So this is the reason for which I will go on edit. I will select colors and fields and in colors and fields, we will add colors. I will click on A. I will search orange color like this type of orange color. I will rename we tape orange, and I will just validate. After that, we can click on Okay and we can validate our orange color here. Now what I will do we add text, and I will go on the top just like this, and we will add text directly on this area. After that, something that we will do we tap inside something and I will tap coffee shop with the first letter upper case and after lower Ks, and then I will select my text. I will go on the right, will activate the white color Oops. Not this white color because here, as you can see, we are directly on the backgrounds. I will go in the text properties, and in the text properties, we activate center first. Color and text distance will work in the Mdels. And here we'll select another font family. What font family will use? We use the font family Lato. I'll reduce this one Lato, and we'll increase the size of the text and then switch for the wise color. I will put a size like maybe 36. After to do this work, I will go in the colors and effect and we will switch for wide. I will adjust a little bit the size of my text of my text frame, and I will put on the top just like that. Then we'll press Control D. We will duplicate and I will put another element just below. We will extend little bits of text here, and we will tape site map. So after to do this work, I will click on Sitemap. We click on sitemap, and I will increase the size. Have this element of text, and we will put I think 60 just like that. I will adjust little bits of size on these directions. Oops, on these directions, if I adjust little bit, yes, like this, and I will put on this area. So at this moment, we can also open in the panels here, the haline and distribute panels and haline and distribute panels, we can just check that coffee shop is in the center and sit map in the center. Now what we will do we create another text frame. And I will create anoer text frame here, and I will extend a little bit on the right, just like that. And after to do this type of work, I will just change the properties. So first, I can double click. I will just type inside, and I will adjust my frame. So first, I will click on my frame, and I want to define a color for this frame. So in the general property, we can use Y after we can go in the text properties, and we can select the same font family. First, I will see the same font family. So it means ato, we can go on the letter L, and I will define in the center. At the same time to be in the center, we will be also on the vertical alignment and the vertical aligment ld ups. We can scale a little bit the size of the text. Let's put something like I think 20 can be convenient, and I can put little bit on the left around this area like this, and I will duplicate two times. I will press Control D, I will duplicate the first time, and I will press Control D, I will duplicate no dark times. I think it's a little too wide. So I will just come back here. I think it's a little too wide. I will reduce a little bit white here. Yes. Just like that. And Oops. I think, yes, I have my duplicated elemment. So I will radiate little bit white, just like this. Not too much, maybe here, and I will duplicate again. I will press Control D, I will duplicate here and Control D, I will duplicate here again. Now I will place my first here, my second in the middle and my third around this area. I will select this suit element, align and distribute, and here we can go in the alignment, we can check the alignment like this, but the most important here because the aligment is already okay is the distribution. And we can use distribute center equilenHrizontal. Now what we will do we go a little bit on the top, like around this area. And I will replace content. Here we will tape menu, and here we can tap reservation. So after to do this type of work, I will select this sweet element, and I will press Control D, I will place just below, just like that. And something that we will do, will just remove this one and remove this one. I will click on this one. I will invert the color of the text and of the element of the frame text. I will go on the properties, feel black and text properties. And I will go in the field options of the text properties, and on the field option, we will switch or wise. Thanks to that, we can adjust like this, and I will press Control D again. I will move on the right, and Control D will move on the right with the same alignment. And we will replace the content. I will tap Coffee shop, I will tape here coffee, and on this area, I will tape tables. We can then selt this element, we can press Control D, and I will duplicate again around here, and I will change the content. Origins, beverages, packages. We can repeat. We select this silaan. Maybe we can stay a little bit more on the top, and I will press Control D, and I will duplicate again. Bran cheese Swindy cheese, sandwich cheese and chops. So after that, we can duplicate a last time. I will take the swilun Control D, and I will duplicate a last time just below. Contact us Dissevent. So it's okay for that. Now what we will do I need to adjust a little bit. Concretely, we have coffee shop on the top, and we can hoops put this little bit more on the top, maybe just like this. Here, we have site map. Oops. The frame is not very convenient. I can maybe reduce just little no it's too much. I will put this one on the top here. I will try to select each element and I will create a group. Here we can create a group with this, this suit frame text. Then a group with this, right click and groups. Then a group with this, right click and group, then a group with this, right click and group, and then a group with this, right click and group as well. We can move little bits of groups on the top, just like that. Then after to do this type of work, I will select all my different groups here and align and distribute, I will check in the alignment, burst center, and distribute center equidon study vertically. Then we can dragging and moving a little bit all the groups just below to let a little bit more space here. Like, for example, this area, a little bit more, and thanks to that we'll be able to adjust on this area. I will scroll down a little bit more, and I think like this, it's convenient. We can create a group also with all this, and you can create a complete groups and put these complete groups also in the center, and it's okay for this first part. 61. Map site part 2: We're going to continue with this training, and for something that we're going to do, it is to create different lines. So for this to create a line, we can click on this area, this is the line tools. And first, I will create a line around this area and you can press Control to constraint horizontal. So create your first line, go on the properties of the line. So first on the right, in the properties, we can activate colors, and inside colors, feel no stroke, we can put the wise color and feel null. After we need to define the size of the stroke with the line value, and here I will change and I will tap a value of 2 millimeters. So let's just tap 2 millimeters. So after that, I will duplicate this line, I will press Control D, I will duplicate. And this line, I will create a rotation, so I will move this point and I will press Control to constraint, just like that. I will take the top of my line and I will extend until here, and I need to place the line in the midle of this area. So how to process, we can move here and move this line first. And as you can see, if you go in this area, you can not directly find the midle because we have a group on the back. But if you select this one and you ungroup, so right click Ungroup, just like that. And you select again your element. Just here, you select again this one. As you can see, you're not going to find the center again. So what you can do, you can select all this group and you can go right click, you can ungroup or you can select this one first, right click and group, then select this one, right click group. Then this one right click and group, then this one right click group, and then this one right click group. Thanks to that, with this rectangle, you will be able to dragging and moving and to find the Midl here. The Midl is located on this area. Here we can extend until maybe this area after will go into the back so it's not extremely important and this one around here. We will move the second rectangles and we can move the second rectangle just like this. Maybe it's a little too much on the top, I will reduce a little bit more and I can put this one maybe on the top, yes, just like that, and I will duplicate with Control D. This rectangle took place also here, and I will press Control D to place another one around here as well. Just below, and need to zoom if you want to adjust a little bit. So now what I will do this one I don't need to have this size will reduce the size hops. I reduce, but I'm not on the right position. You need to press control to keep the vertical or horizontal constraint, and I will put just a small one on this area, and we can extend a little bit here, just like that. I think maybe site map is a little bigger. I go in the text properties, I think we can reduce maybe put this 48 and coffee shop maybe put 32. And I can reduce the size of sitemap, just like this and coffee shop little bit. And I can move site map and snap here and I can extend a little bit this rectangle with control on the top, just like that. I think it's pretty better. Now what we need to do, we need to select this rectangle, shift this rectangle. But you can also put this line, all this line you can select and you can go right click and you can go in levers to lower to bottom. No, I don't see my line anymore because the orange red tangle is on the front. You need to take the orange red tangles and right click levers, raise from one step, just like that. Oops, it's not working properly, need to select these orange red tangles. And if I go on raise, as you can see, I will obtain this render. Not raise. I need to go on levels and lower to bottom, yes, and now it's going to work. A. Now I will select coffee shop here and I will press or I will select site map or anything. Let's coffee shop, I will press Control D, and I will put this one just below. We will scale a little bit the size of the text. I will put maybe around 20 and double click, we replace the content by WWW co shop come like this, CF shop D. Come and I will use my frame text. Maybe we can adjust little bit the size. We have a value of 20. I think it's pretty convenient, and I will put this one around. So now I just need to check that my titles are in the center. I will select this one, coffee shop. I will go in the aligned and distribution panels, and we will work in the alignment. Relative to the page center, this one, relative to the page center, we can also check this line in the center and we can check this line in the center. As you can see, we are not in the center. So it means I need to click here and I need to adjust. And if I put center, I will have offset, so it's a little strange, I think this rectangle is not perfect in the center in comparison of my element or maybe this one. Maybe here, let's try to move this one on this area and adjust this one on this area. I can check the center and now it's going to work. Yeah. I will select this element, I will go Center as well. And for the rest, I think it's okay. You can activate the preview, and this is an example of site map graphic documents that we can create using the software. Maybe coffee shop, we can put coffee shop here and just move a little bit on the top, just like that. I will check Center. 62. Cover part 1: In this training, you are going to create a cover book, and it will be interesting training to see different features. For this, I created a new document. It is A four document with two pages. So we have created two pages, and the two pages, it is facing pages with the left page and the right page just in front each other. And for the, the first thing that I'm going to do is just to create an area for the spine. Craton area for the spine will select rectangle tools. This area, the size of this area will depend only about the number of pages. So here, it's not extremely important, but you need to understand that this area will depend on the number of pages. So I can just create a rectangle just like this first around this area and I can extend this rectangle until here. We'll define a finger on this size. And I can put this in the Mdal. We can just check and we can just put in the Mdal of our document. I will create a new color. So for this, I will go and edit, and I will sell colors and fields will create a new color, I will click on add and I will create a new color with the name we will define blue dark. I will define a dark blue color we select around this dark blue. I think it's pretty good and I will just validate and I will click on Okay. Then we'll select this rectangle, we'll go in colors, and in colors we define the blue dark. At the same time, we can open in the page, the Snap two guides and the snap two items and we can open at the same time in the windows haling and distribute panels. Thanks to that, with haling and distribute panels, we have the different option in the hing panels relative to page, I can define center just like this. But the problem is here is relative to the page. So because it's relative to the page, you can also change margin, you have got selection, but here it's relative to the page. So with the snapping option, normally you can snap to the midle just like this. And I think I need to extend. And on this area, yes, it's pretty good. Now what we will do we craton direct tangles. We'll cretondirect tangles here. We will go in the property panels, and we will select these blue colors. Then I will snap on the left here on my spine, and we can extend on the right, and we can also extend like this. I will take a look normally on stroke, I'm a non, so it's okay for that. We can snap to hoops, yes, the corner of the page. And on this area, I can snap, yes, just like this. And on the back, I can snap here as well. So after to do this work, I will create rectangles. I will create an order rectangles. Just like this, I would like to apply the orange color, but I don't have orange color. So let's just go on edit, and I will define color and fields will click on ad. We will rename this color for orange, and I will define some orange color like maybe this one, and I will validate here and I will activate orange on my shapes. Let's click on the shapes and activate the orange. Little strange. It's not apply directly on my shapes. Let's take a look. It's because I'm on stroke, yes. And if I go on feel orange, perfect. So let's put this rectangle around this area. I can put this one around here, and I will put a little image below. For this, I would select the frame too, I would create a frame, and I will adjust my frame to my rectangles just like this. Maybe the rectangle is enough not enough wide. I will extend a little bit, put my image frame just like this until here, let little bit space here because we'll add ter name. So I will drag and moving here, and I will go get image rightly get image. And I will select the image with a rod and double click. We'll go into image properties, two frame size, pre scaling, let just increase little bit of size and double click, and I will put this in the Midea. So now what we will do we will add some content tools. I think I need to adjust. Yes, I think it's pretty good. I will create se arrows. And to create arrows, we can go on the shape tools we have default shapes, and as you can see, you can in the arrows option you can select the first one. I will crat arrows I'm not going to keep the proportion. I will make something. I will break little bit of proportion, and I will define the wise color. I will craft arrows. I think around this size can be pretty good, and I will put arrows little bit on this area, and I will duplicate these arrows. I will press Control D, I will duplicate the first time, and I will press Control D, and I will duplicate the second time I will place in the big line, how I want to place my arrows like around here, after I can select my three arrows, I will go on the Alien and distribute panels relative to the first selected and I will define top just like that. Then we will also work with the distribute panels and center here. Center occidentally, horizontally, and I will put my three arrows around here. I can also generate a group create a group to perfectly center all my group. Then we will add a frame text. And I will select the text tools just here, and I will create a frame text just around this area. And I will center my text. I will double click, and I will take life of choice. Then we will click on the text options on the text options, text properties, I will define centers. I will go in the columns and distance. I will define Mduls as well. We will increase the text size first, and I can change the font family. I have different font family. I will use maybe andara in bolt, just like this, yes. Life or choice with Kandara in bold, and I will switch for the color with the white color. After let's increase a little bit the size, I will put maybe 42 and life of choice around here. Then I will press Control D, and I will duplicate. We will reduce the size. I will tap directly maybe 24 the size. I will extend a little bit of frame, and I will tap something. Let's just tap something like this. I will click on my element of text here. I put a font size with 20, and we can change the line spacing as well. So we'll increase the line spacing, I think around maybe let's try with 30, just like that. Maybe we can put life of choice, little bit on the top, and this one around here. Let's take a look with the preview, things pretty good. We can adjust little bit position around here. Life of choice, give yourself the ability to live your life and succeed. I think it's pretty good. I will just duplicate life of choice one more time, I will press Control D, and I will play this one around here. One more time, I will go into options. I will scale a little bit, and I will replace the content. We will tape John Doe. After to do this type of work, we put for the size maybe 26, I can scale a little bit, play this one around here, and I think the position is pretty good. Yes, just like this. Don't forget that when you work with a cover, you need to be careful to not put some important element like texts or anything like this too close to the border of the page because when you print, when you print, you will cut area. So this is why it's important to not put very important element too close to this one. It's okay for that. I think it's okay for this first part. And we will work after with the second part. 63. Cover part 2: We are going to continue with this training, and for this something that we are going to do it is to work with this area. So we have worked with the front on this area, so it means the front of the cover, and we will work on this area, so the back of the cover. First thing to do, it is to create one more time shapes. I will define the rectangles, and I will create the rectangles around here. This rectangle will change the color. We'll go in the color options on the right, and we will define the blue color that we use this one. I need to snap to the corner of my page, and you need to be careful not snap here to snap only to the rectangle of the spine, and here we can extend until this area. At the same time I will create another rectangles. We select again the rectangle tool, and we'll create another rectangle, we recuperate the orange color, and I will put in the bottom left corner. And then we can extend until here, and we can extend a little bit around this area, like that. After that, I will add frame text. I will take the frame text tools. We'll craft frame text here around this area like that, and we can let a little bit more space on the left and on the right. And I will enter some text inside. I will double click. I will go right click here, answer to simple text will use will change the language, and I will put maybe just six paragraph and I will put my content here. Now what I will do, I will go into text property. In the text property first we'use the same font families that we use, so we'll use candle. But this time in regular, no need to put this in bold. After we have the size here of the text to click here so we can change the size of the text. I think a value of two will be pretty good. I will increase little bits of space for 16, and maybe we can reduce to only keep this area like that in place maybe around here. I will change as well the colors. We will switch for Ys. Maybe we can let a little bit more space with spacing, maybe 18, and I will extend like this. Perfect. So now I will duplicate, I will press Control D, and I will duplicate. And after to play this different element, what we will do we will change the position of the frame, and we'll select maybe we can play this one around here, this one around here, and we can select the different text frame, go on the Allen and distribute panels. And here we have a different option. We use the distribute panels, and we'll set distribute center ecdntaly vertically, just like that. And if you take a look, we'll obtain this render. I forgot to change the font family so it's not extremely good. I think it's not Kandara this one. Yes, this one is not Kandara as well. Let's select again andara. And this one it is same. Let's select again Kandara. So now after to do this type of work, I just add a little bit effect on this area. So concretely, we will add a drop shadow. I will select the image, and I want to show you how to use a drop shadow again. So when you click on element here, we are going to group the image with the orange rectangles, and we'll go right click with create a group. It's better to add the shadow or all the group. And now you can go on dropshadow and in the drop shadow feature, you can add a drop shadow just like this. So drop shadow will going to appear, and you need to set the parameters. So what we use as a parameters, I think one can be enough, maybe one is not enough, I will put 1.2. Here, I will put 1.2, and here I will put 1.2 as well. Color black, shade 100%, and we have also the opacity value. So I think we can decrease little bit of opacity, and I think we can decrease to 60 opacity. So 100 for the shed and 60 for the opacity, just like this. Thanks to that, we can create an interesting effect. Now I will select the group with the arrows, and it is same. I can add a drop shadow. It will appear on my groups, and I will reduce to offset maybe once, once and once color black, and opacity will put 60 as well. I will select life of choice. We'll add a drop shadow, and I will reduce also. And maybe we can put once, once and once. Let's take a look. Opacity 60 as well, and maybe it's too much. So maybe we can put 0.8. Here, I can try to put 0.8, and here maybe 0.8, just like that. I will select them this from tech, so it is same. Add up shadows and I will put 60% as well, but it's too much maybe I can put only 0.20 0.2, and maybe 0.2 to just add a little bit effect. Maybe it's not enough in this case, let's try with 0.4, 0.4, and I think 0.4 will be pretty good. Yes, it's okay for that. And I will select also John Doe and we'll apply also small effect, ado drop shadows. I will define a transparency of 60 and how I will adjust. Zero point I think six will be pretty convenient, 0.6 and here 0.6. And if I zoom little out, as you can see, you can crack interesting things. So we didn't use really too much the drop effect, and this is why I wanted to show you in this cover how you can use this type of effect one more time. As you can see, it's pretty interesting to use. And I will just click on this area, I will activate the preview options, and that's it. This is an example of this cover. 64. Double page travel part 1: In this training, we are going to create a double page for travel magazines and for this to create this double page, I created a new document, A four document. And for this A four document, I created two pages, and in the document layout, we focus on facing pages, and the first page is on the let. So thanks to that, we can work with this double page. The first thing that I'm going to do is to go on the left here. And when I go on the left, I will go on file, and I will select the document setup. And the document setup we have different options here, and as I explained, we can apply margins. I will apply your margins and I will put a margin of 10 millimeters. I will activate the proportion and I will apply the change to the pages and I will validate. Now something that I will do, I will create a first image on the top, and for this, we select on this area, and I will select the image frame. It will be for a travel magazine. So first I will create my first image frame. I will go on the page, Snap two guide, and snap two items first, and I will snap to the top left corner just like that. So I can adjust my frame on the right. We can snap also the middle of the double page, and we can put this one around here. Now what I will do I will integrate the image inside. So right click Get image. And what image will select were four images with temple and I will select the temples number one. I will go into image property and the image properties two frame size, free scale and we can increase the percentage value. But we'll increase the percentage value and after to increase the percentage value, like around here, I can double click and I can adjust little bit the position of my image, maybe like this. So after to do this work, I will select the text frame tools, and we will craft the text frame on the top left corner. And I will place my text frame here, and I will double click and I will tap travel around the world. So I will take travel around the world. And what we will do first, we will go in the option of the text. The first thing that I'm going to do it is to change the color. We'll go on colors, and I will select is. Oops, I need to select again here, color, and I will go here and I will select is. After to do this type of work because here we have the properties, yes. So text properties, we will change the font family. And for the font family, we will change we will use andaras after to use as I can have the possibility to switch for, for example, bolt, so I will apply bolt. And when I go on the right here, I will adjust with Alintex center, and at the same time in the colon and text distance, we will use Mdx. Then we can adjust little bits of size, and we will put 16. I will extend a little bit. I think 16 is too much. Let's just put 14, and I will adjust little bits of text and we will stay on the horizontal and vertical axis. Perfect. Now what we will do we take this text and we'll press Control D to duplicate and place the text around here. I need to change the color of the text. I will go first here and we will switch for the blue color. As you can see, we have this blue color and we'll activate this blue color just like this. After to activate this blue color, we will extend the frame text on the right until around here. We'll extend a little bit here, and I will tape destination Japan. So I will tape destination Japan. Then we'll click here and we will increase the size. After to increase the size, as you can see, we can start on the left, but we can also start on the center and just adjust little bits of frame text around here. But I think in this case, I want to stay on the left. So I will stay on the left alignment. Here we can tap something on the right, and what we will tap on the right will create stars. We will go in the stars properties. I will switch for five. I will apply factors, and here we can reduce the factors to -42%, and I will create the first stars around here. These stars I will adjust the size in the properties. I will adjust the properties. I will go in colors, and the colors will use the red colors, at the same time struck none, and I will duplicate the stars with Control D first time and Control D second time just like this. At this moment, we are not going to adjust more stars. Let's continue. I will go on the page, I will select manage guides, and we will separate in column and rows, and I will separate in vertical here. We'll apply two verticals and use gaps will apply also gaps of ten millimeter. And we can apply this on the two pages. So apply to all pages, and we need to activate refer to the margin. Important to refer to the margins, and then we can just validate. Then we will select the text frame tools. We'll create a frame text around this area. First I will extend a little bit my frame like this, and I will select the text hoops. I think it's too much. I will reduce a little bit, yes, like this. So I will place the frame text on this area on this corner, and then we can go double click, right click and we can apply a simple text. We will apply a simple text with maybe let's try six paragraph just like that, and I will select this simple text. I will go on the text properties and the text properties. We can maybe reduce a little bit for ten, and we can use ify, just like that. So now I will press Control D, I will duplicate on the right, and I will press Control D, and I will duplicate on the right again. We'll place two image. I will select the frame image. Just like this, we'll place small image around this area, just like this. This small image will replace the content so right clan get image, and I will select the image temple number two. I will integrate the image. And on the right, I will select two frame size frescale increase little bit size inside, double click, and take this part. Then I will duplicate with Control D. I will place another frame around maybe here, and I will adjust with right click Get image, and I will select the temple number three, double click, two frame size, rescaling and we can adjust little bit the size, just like that. Double click, I can move little bit to image inside. Now we need to work with a frame with a wrap text. So how to process, as I explained, you can click on the image. And after to click on the image, what you can do, you can go in the properties and you need to go in the shape properties. In the shape property frost things you will click here to text flow around the frame shapes. Now, something that you can do if you want to adjust, you can also go and edit. And for example, you want to activate Edit contour line to have exactly the distance that you want. You can, for example, put something here, and if I put four, as you can see, I can extend. I will use four and I will validate, and I think it will be pretty good and I will switch for this one, text flow around contour line. I think for this case, um, maybe four is too much. So I'm going to come back just here and we'll click on this area, and I will go in Edit. And maybe we can put with two edit the contour line, and I will reduce from two hoops. What's happened? It's not working properly. Yes, I will come back to this moment. I will click here. I will go on Edit and I will put edit the contour line, I will activate two first time, maybe two or second times. I think it's going to work like this, and I can click on this area. Yes, going to work. I will click on this one, and it is same. I will activate the text around just like that. Can also move little bit image around. And if I want, I can also check in the edit panels, maybe edit the contour line and let's try with two. I will extend a little bit the first time or second time. And if I just validate, I will click here, as you can see, I have more space, but I can adjust little bit my text here. So after I can adjust little bit, eventually, the position of my image just like that. So thanks to that, we can obtain this one. Now I will select my three stars, and we will go on to view panels. We will select in Window Alling and distribute. So we have this hing and distribute panels with all the options, and I will play the first stars on Oops. What's happened here, I'll move, my element of text. Yes, I will switch. I move also my image. Will strange. Yes, just like this. So I will select my first star, my second one. I will place for the these stars on the right, just like this. And then I will select the Swiss stars. I will go in the alignment panels relative to first select the top and distribute my del just like that. Then I will generate a group. I think it's not working properly because this one need to be more inside. Let's select again the si stars and I will align like this. I will go right click, create a group, and I can adjust on this area. Now if I take a look, as you can see, you can create something like this, maybe the stars are a little too big, and again, I think it's going to be okay with this. F s destination Japan in the text properties can try to increase 36. 65. Double page travel part 2: We're going to continue with this training. For this, we have worked with this page, it means we have worked with the left page and we're going to work with the right page. Something that I'm going to do to work with this right page is first to separate in different lines. And for this, I will go on page, I will define manage guide, and we will work with horizontal guides. I will use a gap, I can apply to all pages, and we will apply two horizontals here using a gap and a gap with also a value of ten millimeter and apply to all pages. Now I will just validate. I will zoom a little bit on this area. And something that I will do it is to select the image frame. And with the image frame, I will go on this area, here, and I will put the image frame here. We can adjust to be sure to snap perfectly on the different guides and right click Get image. We'll set our last image, the temple number four, double click, and we can go on the right image properties, two frame size, rescaling and we can increase until two covers all the image. Vertical. After to cover all the image vertically, we can double click and take on a specific area as you can see, I will take maybe this area. And I will just maybe this one and I will click outside. Now we'll go on the right here and we will add frame text as well. I forgot to do something on this text, I forgot to change the lato font family. So here I need to change, and I will select also one more time KandaaFont family. I need to click here, and I need to select the KandaaFont family as well. So Kandara I will select this one, and I will adjust for Kandara I will select this one, and I will adjust for Kandara as well. So now we'll go here. We'll tape a title. And we can select the text frame tools. We cratFrametex here, and this frame text, we will tape something inside. And I will tape temples wind. Then we will click on this text frame. I will change the font family. I will define also Kanda Ras, and we will increase the size. I will put, for example, 24, we will keep the alignment top left. It will be convenient, and we will keep also the black color. I will adjust little bit the size here, and we can add a frame text just below. I can add a frame text just below, like this. Maybe we can extend it'll be this one. And inside this frame text, right click, I will use sample text. We will select the language. I will select maybe eight paragraph. I will just validate like this. And then we will click on the frame text. We will change the font family again, we'll select one more time anda RAs and after we use justify left, and maybe we can decrease or I think we can keep a value of two, just like that. And if I increase a little bit more, I will obtain this. I think I will keep a value of two. Now if I take a look, we will obtain this render just like that. Maybe you can adjust little bit to text. I adjust here my frame and this one until this area. Now what we will do, we can cry to group. I can select all this and I can go right click, I can try to group, and I will press Control D to duplicate this group, and I will press Control D to duplicate this group again. Now we can edit the content more conveniently, we can ungroup again. So each group we can ungroup again, and each group this time I can ungroup again. I'm not going to replace the image here, we are going to keep the same image. It's not extremely important. I will just replace the content here with tape temple, then, and here we tape temples fire. For example. So now if I take a look, as you can see, we'll obtain this render on the right. Now, I would like to change a little bit the color. So what we will do concretely, here in this area, we have this content. So this content, we will change for the blue color. We'll click here and we will switch for the blue color that we use in this title. So I will switch and I will work with this blue color, and this one it is same. I will work with this blue color. Now, I would like to create on the right page, a rectangle on the background with a clear blue color. And for this, I will have to create a new color. First, I will create a default shape. We will do something like this. I will extend until this around this area. And we can just extend until here and put on the background. So right click, I will select S two, I will select levers and lower to bottom, just like that. Now I want to create a new color. I will go into Edit options, we select color and fills, and we will define a new color. I will click on ad here, and something that we will do we create blue I will select blue sky, for example, and I will define search clear blue colors. Maybe this one we can adjust little bit more like maybe this type of colors, and I will just validate. Now if I click on Okay, I can replace this color in the property panels. We can go in the color features and in the stroke options. So stroke, no, feel blue colors just like that. Pretty when if I want to adjust the color, I can, so I can come back here, I can select color and feels. I can adjust again my color. I just come back on blue sky, edit, and I can adjust the color again. So I'm not too satisfied, I can adjust a little bit. Maybe I can make something a little bit brighter, for example, I will just validate and if I validate here, as you can see the color will change as well. So something that I will do at the end, I will go in the page, manage guide, and we will delete all the guide just like this. At the same time, I will go on file document setups and I will go in the different options that we have here and margins and bleed. I will come back with a value of zero to definitely see my render. I will apply to all the pages. I will validate and now I can take a look here to the final render just like that. Something that we can do, maybe we can here, maybe we can adjust a little bit more space, I think on this area so I can just move a little bit to content here. And at the same time, I think like this it's convenient. Maybe we can move a little bit of stars just below. Thanks to that, we have a little bit more space, and I think it's better. Yes, just like that. Again, if I select destination Japan, we can adjust until here, and this one we can adjust little bit on this direction, just like that. 66. Recipe journal part 1: In this training, we're going to create a recip journal. So what we're going to do, we're going to create this journal interior, and we will create a model of page for this using directly the master page, and then we'll apply this master page on multiple pages to repeat to create this interior for recep journal. The first thing that I'm going to do is to create A A for document with a single page, and we need to create a new master to focus on the master page. First, before to do this, I will go on file here, I will select the document setup and the document setups property will select margins and bleed and we'll apply your margins at 20 millimeters. I will apply on all the pages here on pages and master page, and I will validate just like that. So now we'll create a Master page. I will double click here, and we will create a new Master page, and we will rename this Master page for recip. So we'll just type recip on this area, and I will just validate like this. After we are in the Master page, we are going to create the main element first and after we'll focus on the disposition. So first, I will select the text tools, frame text tools, and I will create a frame text. We'll go on the page. We'll activate Snap two guides and we'll activate Snap two items. I will snap to my margins just like this. I will reduce little bit on these directions, and I can tap some content inside and we will tap resip just like this. So after tape recipe use font family. We go in the text properties, and in the text property, we select the font family calibre. After to sex the font family calibre, I will increase the size. And I will define a value here, so it's not enough. Let just increase and I will tape something like 48. Then we will adjust little bit to size on the direction, these directions, maybe around here, and I will duplicate. I'll press Control D, I will duplicate on these directions. And I will adjust the content. I will adjust like around 26, and I will tape preparation time, just like this, I think it's too big. Let's reduce. I will put something like 20, and I will adjust little bit my frame, like for example, this, and we will duplicate with Control D, and I will put little bit on the right, and I will tape cooking time. Double click and I will tape cooking time. We'll adjust each time here we can adjust little bit on this area, and here we can adjust the frame also little bit around this area. Then we can duplicate preparation time. I will press Control D, I will scroll just below. Maybe this one we can adjust to position just like this and I will double click and what I will tape will tape number of person I need to scale on these direction. Number of persons, and I will press Control D, I will duplicate also on this area and I will tap difficulty. I will adjust my frame on this direction. The frame will stay on the top left corner for the alignment of the text, top left corner horizontally and vertically. I can move cooking time and difficulty a little bit on the right, and I will duplicate again. I will press Control D, and I will duplicate again here. I will scale a little bit my frame on this area, as you can see, I will increase the size of the text, not too much like around 26 and I will replace the content. I will tap ingredient. Then we will duplicate. First before to duplicate, I will adjust little bit the frame again and I will press Control D. You can scale little bit of frame and we will be replaced by preparation. It's okay for that. We will duplicate preparations. We'll just scrollle and arrive around this area, and we will tap something different. We'll tape not. And for this, we'll reduce also the size of the text, 22 for this one. And on this area, we will tape we create rectangles. I will create rectangles, the fault shapes. I will create two rectangles here. I will scale little bit on these directions and in the properties of this rectangle will go in colors. What we will go in colors we apply feel non, stroke black, and for the stroke, I can adjust. We'll go in the stroke options and I can adjust the size of the stroke. I will go in the line features and in the line features, we can switch. And who is too much. Let's just tap one, just like that. I will put note around maybe this area or maybe this area. I will adjust little bit here in the middle around here. And I will duplicate note, I will press Control D. I will play this one in the center of my rectangles. We will replace by photo. And after that, I will go on the right, and I can this time center the text properties. So center horizontal and with column and text distance, vertical. I will adjust a little bit of colors in the colors when I go in the properties here. In the color properties, we can use a little shared value to reduce the transparency. But the problem is the problem is is that here I'm not on the text, so I need to do this, but on the text properties, and when I go on colors, I can reduce here and I can put maybe 60%. And we can put this in the center of the rectangle. If I don't find the center of the rectangles, we can open the panels window, haline and distribute. Thanks to that, we have haline distribute swap. And if I select this frame text, and if I select this and maybe photo, we can also reduce little bit size. It means in the text properties, we can just put something small like maybe I think we can work with 20, and I will select the frame text, shift the rectangles and inhaling and distribute panel center and center. And I would put this on. I need to check that I'm perfectly on the right. And as you can see, we need to adjust just that I have my stroke. Yes, now it's okay. I will check the stroke of this one properties. Lines 1 millimeter, I think it's okay. The last thing that I'm going to do is to create a line, and I will create a small line around this area with press control, and this line I will go in the properties. We will select for the color, feel none, stroke black, and in the line options, we will apply also a value of one, just like this. 67. Recipe journal part 2: We're going to continue with the recip journals. And for this something that we can do, it is to continue to work with the master. So I will click here, we have created these masters. And on this master, what I will do, I will add different line to be able to note the different answers. What we will do we select the line tools here, and I will start to create a line I will press control, and this line will enter the properties first that I need. For this, I will go in the color features and feel none. And here on this area, we can go in the stroke options, and in the stroke options, we will define black. So after to define the black colors, I will be able to go on lines and we will increase little bid size. I will put just a very small value like zero point. I think 0.2 will be enough. So I will put 0.2. And we will activate, I need to come back to the color properties, so feel non strap black. And in the light properties, we can change the type of line for the second one dotted. As you can see, if you click here, you don't see, but if you click outside, you can find this line appearing here. I will extend this line until to snap to the right here. And after that about the position, we need to adjust little bit the position, as you can see in comparison of the text, just a little bit below. And I will duplicate with Control D this line, and I will place another one just below. I will change scale this line. I will press Control every time to keep the right proportion, and I will place another one around this area. And I will adjust it will be the size, just like this. I think it's more convenient if I have the right disposition, so maybe we can reduce a little bit the preparation time. Yes, we can change and play this one around here, and I will press Control D. I will duplicate to have another one around this arraor we let little bit space here. This one can put around this array. I think like this, it's convenient. Cooking time, we can move difficulty coking time a little bit on the right. And something that we can do, we can try to be on the same position. What does it mean? It means we can adjust the frame text here and we can adjust the position of this element like that, and we can adjust the position to be on the same alignment with this one. So it means this line we can try to adjust to be in the same position with this one, just like that. Then I will click on this one, I will press Control D, and I will duplicate to be on the right, and I will duplicate until this area, and I will scroll and move a little bit just like this. Now what we will do here we add different stars. I will select the star tools. I will go in the properties option of the stars. I will reduce the corners by five, apply a factors. And with the factors, as I explained before, many times you can be around -40, something like this. Let's try -42%, and I will create small stars on the directions. So this stars where we will do we need to go on the right to go in the property s panels and to define struck colors field colors non, struck colors black. And for the line here, we can adjust and we can replace with a value of not one it's definitely too much, 0.2 as well. I will duplicate these stars with Control D. I will duplicate the first time, Control D, I will duplicate Noer times, Control D, again, and then Control D again until to be on the right. I will select these five different stars. I think like this is pretty convenient, and I will go in the Helling and distribute panels, relative to the first selected, go, for example, on the top, and yes, in the distribution panels, use this one, distribute center ekinon sly horizontally. Then go right click, crap groups, and thanks to that, we can address the position of the group if we need. Now I will select these lines, and I will press Control D, will duplicate this line to place one on the left here. And with Control to keep the horizontal axis, I will extend until this area. And I will repeat the process. I will press Control D, I will duplicate. I will press Control D, I will duplicate. Then I will select the sui lines. I will press Control D, and I will duplicate the sui lines, and then I will duplicate the six and I will press Control D to place around here. I think we can adjust maybe a little bit this element for the image, and I will select my frame text and my frame text here and the rectangle for the image, and I will go in the ailing. I will check again center and center. And after that, I will need to select the two element and to move again in the bottom right corner. Thanks to that, I can move little bit notes around here. So now what we can do, we can, for example, select all this line here. And with all this line in the distribute panels, we can use distribute centerkan study and the alignment I can use left to check. Now I will be able to duplicate with Control D. I will duplicate on the right. I will like little bit space around this area, and I will use the same aligment on the left. I just need to extend my line until to arrive here. Now I can click on the line in the midle. We can move little bit on the top, press Control every time we keep the right proportion, and we can put the line maybe I think it's convenient. Maybe a little bit more on the left, one step, yes, like this. And I can extend my line with control until this area. So now what I will do? I will select these four different lines, and I will press Control D, and I will place four lines also on this area just like that. Maybe one more time, as you can see, we are a little bit too high, so maybe I can scroll down the not just below, and maybe we can put this one and this one a little bit more scroll a little bit more below, also, just like this to adjust. And I can adjust my frame again like this, a little bit more on the right arm. Yes, maybe you can put the photo like this, and I need to adjust this one in the center. I need to select the two element again. And one more time, I will adjust center center and if I select the text and the rectangles, I will adjust again the position around here. That's it. Now, I think it's convenient. If I take a look, you can create this type of model of page. If for example, I'm satisfied, I can have the possibility to go on five, document setup again. So let's click outside, return to normal page and select file document setup in the margin and bleed, I will apply zero. Proportions and apply change to pages and masters, and I will just validate. To know what I can do, we have our masters created ready, and we can just repeat the masters on multiple pages to create our interiors. So how to process, we can just get out. Return to normal page mode here, and I will go on page and insert page. So we can go and insert. And for example, I will put on 40 pages. So I will insert 40 pages at the end, and I will apply my master page receipt. If you want to repeat on 200 pages, you can do 200 pages. It's after at your convenience depending on the interior that you come to create. Let's take the example 40, and I will just validate. Now I will just delete my first page, but in the first page, you can keep the first page to create introduction to create the first page of introduction for your interior for your interior with a title or anythings like this. If it's um so it means you can keep this first page. If here I'm focused only on the interior, I can go on page, and I will delete the first one, delete 1-1, and that's it. As you can see, we can repeat this page multiple times and it's convenient. And when you do this type of work, it's important to work on master because if I edit the master, for example, I edit the master, and finally, maybe I would like to maybe recipe. I would like to add letter. So for example, I add the letter like this, for example, just to show you your return here. And as you can see, the change will be made on all the pages, and it's convenient. You don't need to change all the pages. If you have 200 pages, you are not going to change something on 200 pages. So you will change only the master. If I want to change again, I will select double click recipe, I will zoom here, and I will double click. I will remove this letter again. I will adjust little bit my frame just like that. And now if I get out return here, as you can see, the change has been made as well. So this is why it's convenient. So an example about what you can do if you want to create interior using a master and to repeat this master on multiple pages. 68. Book photo part 1: In this training, we're going to create a photo book and it will be interesting training to see different features. So thanks to that we'll be able to work with masters, and we will be able to work with edges. The first thing that I'm going to do it is to go in the masters here. But first, I will apply margins. So for this will go in the file here, we define document setups, and we have these different options here, I will go in margin and bleeds and I will define margins on the left. So on the left, I will define margins 30 on the right, I will define margins 30 as well, and I will define margins on the top also. On the top we increase a little bit more with 40, and on the bottom we apply also a value of 40. Just like that. After I will apply to le page and All Master page, and I will just validate and I created these margins. After that, we'll crat Masters. I will go in Masters and I will click here, add a new Masters, and I will crat my first master. It will be the Masters Japan. And I will just validate here. And after we crat another master hoops, I pull a guide, but I don't need to pull a guide in my case. I will zoom little bit and on this master, we cratRctangles on the back. First, I will create two colors that we will reuse after, so I will go and edit. I will see color and fills, and we can click on Ad here. And I will create more bright blue color, so I will define some blue color like maybe this one, and I will tape blue bright. And I will just validate with this color. After I will click on Ad again and I will define a green color a little bit more darker. Maybe this one. Let's just adjust a little bit of color like maybe this one, and I will tape green let's just tape green dark. After that, I will validate like this here. After to do this type of work, I will create rectangles, default shapes rectangles. And on this master page, we can create a rectangle. I can go on the page option, snap two guides and page option snap two items. We can put the rectangles on the back just like this. I will define on the right the color that I have created the blue bright here. And the problem is, as you can see, I don't see my margin. So for this, I need to go on file. I need to re pred the document set up, so file documents setup. And the problem is when you click on Margin and bleed, margin not on margin and bleed when you go in the guide features. As you can see, the object is in the foreground of the margin. So we need to put the margins just before the content object. And now if I just validate and I go to my master, I can see the margin, just like that. I will create a text here. We will use this wide, and I will tape inside. Double click. Nature exploration book. After that, we can also extend until the margin and the top of the edge to create this type of frame. After that, I will go into option text property. So first we'll define font family. I will use the font family one more time that we can use a lot caliber. Then we will increase the size and I will put a size of maybe 30, and I will put in the center horizontally and vertically, I will put colons, and I will put Mdels as well. Natural exploration book. We change the colors. I will go in the colors and effects of the text, and we will switch is. Here we can put is. We duplicate, I will press Control D, and I will duplicate here. We can put also on this area, and I will tape, double click And I will type number travel natural. So after to do this type of work, I will read it and I will redo it until maybe maybe I will put 26 in this case. So after that, we have our first masters. To create the second master, weuse this base. We'll just duplicate the selected masters and we will rename our masters Iceland. So here we name for masters. Iceland, I will validate. And in this master, Island will just change the color of the rectangle. And for this, I can go in the property and select my green dark color. So now it's okay, I can get outside. I will just create two page of introduction and after we'll apply the master on different pages that we will trad. But first, I have this page. I will Go on page, I will insert another one just after. And on this first page, we'll do the same type of work. So first, I will create a rectangle, but this time on the first page, so we'll create the first page. On this area, we can snap the rectangle to the border of the page, and I will go on the right, and I will select Lu Bright. Now something that I will do, I will select the text tools and I will create a frame text around maybe here, we double click. We will tap Japan, I will select my text frame and on the options on the text property, we define center here. And on this area, we can define also the column and text options, and here we can define Midols. After to define Midls, I will click on the options here and we will change for wie. I will increase the text size. I forgot to use a font family calibry so we'll switch the font family. And we will define one more times libri. After that, so I tape Jap, I put Calibri, I increase again the size of my text, and I will put maybe 80, and I will duplicate with Control D, and I will go here. We will reduce the size. Maybe I can reduce to 40 and double click, I will change the content to tape discover maybe temples, and we'll adjust the size of the text frame, the size of the text frame, this one as well, just like that. We can maybe a little bit more space. We can select the two elements of text here, and we can thanks to that dragging and moving to center, just like that. And we'll obtain this render, as you can see. Now what we will do, we will click on these two elements of text. We'll click on all the content of this page. And we can duplicate all the content with Control D and place all the content to the second page and snap to the corner. And we just need to adjust the content inside. First, I will select the blue rectangles property will switch for the green dark. And then if I zoom we adjust directly the frame text. So Japan will replace, and we will tap Iceland and here discover Temple will replace, and we will discover Natural. So just tape nature just like this. And that's it. So it's okay. We'll have this two page. So we have two page created of introduction. At the same time, we have the Master Japan and the master Iceland, perfect. And after that we'll be able to add few content and few images. 69. Book photo part 2: We're going to continue with this training. And for this something that we are going to do it is to add edges, and we will add pages with the master. For this, we will go on this area and we'll select page, insert page, and we'll insert page after the page number one, we will insert four pages 4 pages here. Then we can apply the Master Page Japan here validate and I created, as you can see, four pages with the MasterPag Japan. Now at the end, we will go on page. We will select Insert and we will insert three pages. This time, at the end, with the MasterPage Iceland, just like that. Why only se Because I was using only three images of Iceland and for Japan, we will use four. So after to do this type of work, what we will do? We'll go just on this first area on the page number two. And here we'll just add content. I'll select the image frame, and we will snap on this area here on the margin, can extend little bit image. And I will insert image inside. So right click Get Image, and we'll select the image temple number one. Then we will go in the image properties and to frame size free scaling, let's increase the size of the image. When I will be satisfied, I will double click and I will dragging and moving here. After I will create a text, I will define a text, I will snap on the top of the image here. We will double click, I will tape temple for example, let's just tap temple fire exist. I will go in the options. We will reuse the same font family. In this case, I will use the same font family calibory we will go in center here, and I will define also on these options. Colon takes distance Mdels. We'll go back in the color, I will select the wise color. I define calibre font family, and we will increase the size. Let's put, for example, 30. Then we'll craft another frame text from here until here. This area, as you can see, we can snap. Maybe you can extend a little bit this frame with a title and this one just here. I will define one more time the font family calibre. After that, we will double click here inside. I will define the color as well, is and double click inside, y click simple text. I will define maybe six paragraph, change the content with this language, and I will just fill with my text just like that. I will click on the text. Maybe we can increase 14, and I will use justification just like this. I can increase little bits of fixed life spacing to make something a little bit better. Maybe 18 will be pretty good. And maybe we can reduce to 12 and put on the spacing 18, just like that. And that's it. It's too small, maybe I will put 14. Yeah. So it's okay for that. So now what I'm going to do, I'm just going to select the three element, the image, the titles, and also so the image. The title and the content here. And we can just go right click and we can copy. Then we go on the other page and right click and we can past here, just like that. Or I could duplicate also as well, because if you do something like this, you need to place again the content. At the same time, we can select all this element. You can press Control D. The best way if I want to run it all time, you just press Control D and you duplicate all this element on each page even on island. You can play this element here, and we will just replace the content. So you can just duplicate multiple times. You can duplicate multiple times just like this until the last page. And now you just replace each content. To replace its content, let's slit the second one. Here we'll replace the image. Right click get image, I will see temples number two, we'll repeat the process image property two frame size, free scaling, increase the size, double click, adjust, and we will change here. We'll tape something like temple wind, for example, and I will continue. I will click here, I will go right click, get image. We select temple number three will use the right to frame image free scaling. Let's increase the size and then double click. We can adjust a little bit and change the content. Here, I will tape maybe pound, and I will select this one and right click. I will use Get Image, just like that. And I will select temple number four. We will frame size free scaling, increase the size in percentage value. And then double click and adjust little bit of position, and here we can change and we will tape temple maybe forest. And I will continue Iceland. So here we'll replace the image. Rightly get image. I have the image Iceland number one. I put the image frame size free scaling and we can increase the size. Then double click and adjust little bits of position. Here, I will change. And we will replace here we tap Explore mountains. Then we'll click here. I will replace the image so right click Get image. I will select Iceland number two to frame size freescaling and double click to adjust and double click here. Explore volcanoes, and then I will select the last one. I will click on the image or click get image. I will select Iceland number three. Then two frame size pre scaling, increase the size, double click. I will put this one maybe just here and double click, I will tape explore lakes, just like that. Yeah. And that's it, I think we are okay with these different options. After that, if you want, you can create any first page, it means I can go on page insert page before the page number one, for example, I can insert one page. Just like this. And on this first page, maybe I can use the default shapes. I can create rectangles. I can select any color. It depends about what we want to do, and I can, for example, raise Control D with This one hoops. Not only this one because here, I'm going to duplicate these two elements and press Control D. I will play these two element here, and I can just select this content and I can tap for example, book will replace the content. I will tape photo, and that's it. I can adjust after if we need. I can increase the size of this one and this one I will increase the size as well. So just to show you that after you can adjust at your convenience, you can create a first page of introduction, anything like this. And here I just show you with ten pages, but you can repeat this process 100 pages, anything that you want. The interesting thing if you work with a master, if for example, you want to change something like the color or you want to change natural exploration book, number, travel, nature, this will be apply directly on your pages with the master. So this is why it is useful as I explained. So that's it, I'm going to activate the preview here, and this is just an example about what we can do.